BM 4400 Series.

Instruction handbook
Language English
Translation
Document No. 5.12008.08
Part No. 444496
Status 26-Apr-2017
b maXX 4000
BM4400, BM4400 ES

BM4600, BM4600 ES
BM4700, BM4700 ES
Basic Units/
Power modules
with Servo Controller
E 5.12008.08 Read the Instruction handbook before starting any work!

Copyright This Instruction handbook may be copied by the owner in any quantity, but only for internal
use. This Instruction handbook may not be copied or reproduced, in whole or in part, for any
other purposes.
The use and disclosure of information contained in this Instruction handbook are not permit-
ted.
Designations and company marks contained in these Instruction handbook could be trade-
marks, the use of which by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
rights holder.
Preliminary information
Warning Insofar as this document is identified as being preliminary information, the following
applies:
This version is regarded as providing advance technical information to users of the described
devices and their functions at an early enough time in order to adapt to any possible changes
or expanded functionality. 
This information must be regarded as being preliminary, as it has not yet passed through
Baumüller's internal review process. In particular, this information is still subject to changes,
thus no legal liability can be derived from this preliminary information. Baumüller assumes no
liability for damages that might arise from this possibly faulty or incomplete version. 
If you detect or suspect any content errors and/or major form errors in this preliminary infor-
mation, we request that you notify the Baumüller support specialist responsible for you.
Please provide us, via this employee, with your insights and comments so that we can take
them into account and include them when transitioning from the preliminary information to
the final information (as reviewed by Baumüller). 
The conditions stipulated in the following section under „Obligatory“ are invalid in case of pre-
liminary information.
Obligatory This Instruction handbook are a part of the equipment/machine. This Instruction handbook
must be available to the operator at all times and must be in legible condition. If the equip-
ment/machine is sold or moved to another location, these Instruction handbook must be
passed on by the owner together with the equipment/machine.
After any sale of the equipment/machine, this original and all copies must be handed over to
the buyer. After disposal or any other end use, this original and all copies must be destroyed.
When the present Instruction handbook are handed over, corresponding sets of instruction
handbooks of a previous version are automatically invalidated. 
Please note that the specifications/data/information are current values according to the
printing date. These statements are not legally binding with regard to measurements,
computation or calculations.
Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH reserves the right, in developing its products further, to change
the technical specifications and handling of it products concerned without prior notice.
No liability can be accepted concerning the correctness of these Instruction handbook unless
otherwise specified in the General Conditions of Sale and Delivery.
 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH

Ostendstr. 80 - 90
90482 Nuremberg
Germany
Tel. +49 9 11 54 32 - 0 
Fax: +49 9 11 54 32 - 1 30
Email : mail@baumueller.de
Internet: www.baumueller.de
Table of Contents
1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.1 Information on the instruction handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2 Key to symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3 Limitation of liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.4 Copyright protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.5 Other applicable documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.6 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.7 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.8 Guarantee provisions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.9 Customer service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.10 Terms used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.11 List of other applicable documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.1 Contents of the instruction handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2 Changes and modifications to the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.3 Usage for the intended purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.4 Responsibility of the operating company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.5 Protective devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.6 Training of the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.7 Personal protective equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.8 Special hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.9 Fire fighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.10 Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.11 Conduct in case of danger or accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.12 Signs and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.1.1 Dimensions BM441X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.1.2 Dimensions BM442X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.1.3 Dimensions BM4X3X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.1.4 Dimensions BM4X4X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.1.5 Dimensions BM4X5X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.1.6 Dimensions BM4X6X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.1.7 Dimensions BM4X7X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.2 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.3 Operating requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.3.1 System types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
3.3.2 Requirements to the energy supply / supply system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.3.3 Motor requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.3.4 Required environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.3.5 Correction factors if the operating conditions are changed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.3.5.1 Mounting height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.3.5.2 Environmental temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.3.5.3 Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3.3.6 Coherence between rated current and peak current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.3.7 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 3

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Table of Contents
3.4 Electrical data basic units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

3.4.1 Electrical data of the universal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.4.1.1 Electrical data BM441X universal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
3.4.1.7 Electrical data BM4X7X universal units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.4.2 Electrical data BM46XX acceleration units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
3.4.2.1 Electrical data BM4632 acceleration units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.4.2.2 Electrical data BM464X acceleration units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
3.4.3 Electrical data BM47XX continuous current units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
3.5 Electrical data power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.5.1 Electrical data BM442X power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
3.5.2 Electrical data BM443X power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
3.5.3 Electrical data BM444X power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3.5.4 Electrical data BM445X power modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
3.5.5 Electrical data BM446X power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3.6 Additional data referring to water-cooled brake resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
3.7 Output frequency dependent continuous current derating BM4XXX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
3.8 Output frequency dependent maximum current derating BM46XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3.9 Overload monitoring modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
4 Design and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4.1 Functioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4.2 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
4.2.1 Standard controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
4.2.2 ES controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
4.2.3 Encoder modules slot/position A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
4.3 Interconnect devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.3.1 Mix mode BM443X generation 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
4.4 Type plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
4.5 Type code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.5.1 Explanation type code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
4.5.2 Explanation version code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
4.6 UL notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4.7 Display and operation elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4.7.1 LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
4.7.2 7-segment display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
4.7.3 Address switch S1 - S4 (only ES controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5 Transport and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
5.1 Safety notes for transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
5.2 What to observe when transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
5.3 Transport inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
5.4 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
5.5 Disposal of the packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

of 358 Document No.: 5.12008.08 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
Table of Contents
6 Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.1 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.2 Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.2.1 Drilling patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6.2.1.1 Drilling patterns BM441X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6.2.1.2 Drilling patterns BM442X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6.2.1.3 Drilling patterns BM4X3X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6.3 Mounting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6.3.1 Requirements mounting plate for cold plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
6.3.2 Connecting the water cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.1 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.2 Voltage test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
7.3 Demands on the power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
7.3.1 Connection instructions at special power supply systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
7.4 Requirements to the connecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7.5 Protection of the device and the cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7.6 PE connection and RCD compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
7.7 Installation requirements with regard to EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
7.8 Requirements for the motor temperature sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
7.9 Installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
7.10 Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
7.10.1 Connection diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
7.10.1.1 BM44XX, BM46XX, BM47XX (basic units). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
7.10.1.2 BM44XX, BM46XX, BM47XX power module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
7.10.2 Terminal overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
7.10.2.1 Terminals BM4412, BM4413 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
7.10.2.2 Terminals BM4414 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
7.10.2.3 Terminals BM442X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.10.2.4 Terminals BM443X, BM463X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7.10.2.6 Terminals BM445X, BM446X, BM465X, BM466X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
7.10.2.8 Terminals BM4755 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
7.10.2.9 Terminals BM447X, BM4773 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
7.10.3 Electrical connection power unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
7.10.4 Requirements for the screwing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
7.11 Controller terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.11.1 Encoder connection slot/position A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
7.11.2 Analog input slot/position D and E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
7.11.3 Digital inputs slot A to E/position D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Table of Contents
8 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
8.1 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
8.2 Operating concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
8.2.1 Enable signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
8.3 Power on switching frequency / DC link charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.3.1 Power supply switch-on frequency BM441X and BM442X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.3.2 Power supply switch-on frequency BM443X (Generation 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
8.3.3 Power supply switch-on frequency BM443X generation 2, BM4X4X to BM4X7X . . 226
8.3.4 Calculation of the maximum permitted external capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
8.3.5 Effects of the different charging circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
8.3.6 Table of charging times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
9 Troubleshooting and fault correction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
9.1 Behavior in case of malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
9.2 Monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
9.3 Fault detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
9.4 Error handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
9.4.1 Error reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
9.4.2 Error parameters, error messages, error reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
9.4.2.1 Error messages (2nd level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
9.4.2.2 Sub-error messages (3rd level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
9.4.3 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
10 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
10.1 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
10.2 Environmental condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
10.3 Inspection intervals - maintenance notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
10.3.1 Periodic maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
10.4 Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
11 Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
11.1 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
11.1.1 Cables power supply - device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
11.1.2 Cables device - motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
11.1.3 Cable control voltage supply/signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
11.1.4 Interface cable RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
11.2 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
11.2.1 Fuses BM441X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
11.2.2 Fuses BM442X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
11.2.3 Fuses BM4X3X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
11.2.4 Fuses BM4X4X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
11.2.5 Fuses BM4X5X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
11.2.6 Fuses BM4X6X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
11.2.7 Fuses BM447X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
11.2.8 UL fuse in the ballast circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
11.2.9 24V extra-low voltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
11.3 Mains filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
11.3.1 Block diagram of filter for mains applications (simplified) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
11.3.2 Baumüller mains filter type code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
11.3.3 Required mains filter environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
11.3.4 Electrical data mains filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
11.3.5 Mains filter selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Table of Contents
11.4 Power chokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

11.5 Baumüller accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
11.5.1 Shielding clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
11.5.2 Cable RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
11.5.3 Accessories Ethernet/EtherCAT®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
11.5.4 Accessories - CANopen®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
11.5.5 Encoder cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
11.5.6 Design cover and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
12 Shutdown, storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
12.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
12.2 Requirements to the executing personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
12.3 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
12.4 Demounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
12.5 Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
12.6 Recommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
13 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
13.1 Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
13.2 Disposal facilities/authorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Appenidx A - Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Appenidx B - Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
B.1 Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Appenidx C - Safe stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
C.1 Methods to avoid an unexpected starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
C.2 Safe Torque Off (STO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
C.2.1 Safety classifications and safety notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
C.2.2 Function principle STO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
C.2.2.1 Shutdown paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
C.2.2.2 Sequence diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
C.2.2.3 Connection diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
C.3 Safe stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
C.3.1 Safety categories according to EN ISO 13849-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
C.3.2 The safety relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
C.3.3 Application example for machine of category 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
C.3.4 Application example for machine of category 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
C.3.5 Application expansions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
C.4 Requirements on an OSSD test pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
C.5 Technical data safety relay module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Table of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Overview of Revisions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Table of Contents

1 GENERAL
1.1 Information on the instruction handbook
These instruction handbook provides important information on handling the device. A pre-
requisite for safe work is compliance with all specified safety notes and procedural in-
structions.
Additionally, the valid accident prevention regulations and general safety regulations ap-
plicable to the scope of application the device must be complied with.
Read the instruction handbook, particularly the safety notes chapter, completely before
beginning any work on the device. The instruction handbook is part of the product and
must be kept accessible to personnel at all times in the immediate vicinity of the device.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
1.2 Key to symbols
1.2 Key to symbols
Warning notes
Warning notes are identified by symbols in these instruction handbook. The notes are in-
troduced by signal words that express the extent of the danger.
It is imperative that these notes be complied with and are conscientiously regarded in or-
der to prevent accidents, personal injury and material damage.
DANGER!
....points out an immediately dangerous situation that will lead to severe injuries or
death if not avoided.
WARNING!
....points out a potentially dangerous situation that could lead to severe injuries or
death if not avoided.
CAUTION!
....points out a potentially dangerous situation that could lead to minor or slight inju-
ries if not avoided.
NOTICE!
....points out a potentially dangerous situation that could lead to material damage if
not avoided.
Recommen-
dations
NOTE!
....highlights useful tips and recommendations, as well as information for efficient and
problem-free use.

General 1
1.3 Limitation of liability
All specifications and notes in these instruction handbook were compiled taking into ac-
count the applicable standards and regulations, the state of the art and our knowledge
and experience of many years.
The manufacturer assumes no liability for damages due to:
m noncompliance with the instruction handbook
m usage for other than the intended purpose
m usage by untrained personnel
The actual scope of delivery can vary in case of optional equipment, laying claim to addi-
tional order options, or on account of the latest technical changes to the explanations and
representations described herein.
The user bears the responsibility for performing service and initial operation in accor-
dance with the safety regulations of the applicable standards and all other relevant gov-
ernmental or local regulations concerning the dimensioning and protection of conductors,
grounding, disconnectors, overcurrent protection, etc.
The person who carried out the mounting or installation is liable for any damage incurred
when assembling or connecting the device.
1.4 Copyright protection
The instruction handbook must be treated confidentially. It is to be used exclusively by

personnel who work with the device. The consignment of the instruction handbook to third
persons without the written permission of the manufacturer is prohibited.
NOTE!
The specific contents, text, drawings, images and other representations are copy-
righted and subject to industrial property rights. Any prohibited usage is punishable
by law.
EnDat® is a registered trademark of Dr. Johannes Heidenhain GmbH,

83301 Traunreut, Germany
EtherCAT® is a registered trademark of Beckhoff Automation GmbH, 
33415 Verl, Germany
Hiperface® is a registered trademark of SICK STEGMANN GmbH, 
78166 Donaueschingen, Germany
SinCos® is a registered trademark of SICK STEGMANN GmbH, 
78166 Donaueschingen, Germany
b maXX® is a registered trademark of Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
1.5 Other applicable documents
NOTE!
Please note, that BAUMÜLLER is not responsible to examine whether any (industrial
property) rights of third parties are infringed by the application-specific use of the
BAUMÜLLER products/components or the execution.
1.5 Other applicable documents
Components of other manufacturers are integrated into the device. For these purchased
parts, hazard assessments have been performed by the respective manufacturers. The
compliance of the design construction with the applicable European and national regula-
tions has been declared for the components by the respective manufacturers.
1.6 Spare parts
WARNING!
False or defective spare parts can lead to damage, malfunction or complete
failure, thus endangering safety.
Therefore:
m Only use original spare parts of the manufacturer.
Procure spare parts through an authorized dealer or directly from the manufacturer.
See also ZAccessories and Spare Parts– from page 267.
1.7 Disposal
Insofar as no take-back or disposal agreement has been made, please disassemble units
correctly and properly recycle the constituent parts.
See also ZDisposal– on page 317.
1.8 Guarantee provisions
The guarantee provisions are stated in a separate document of the sales documents.
The devices described herein may only be operated in accordance with the stipulated
methods, procedures and conditions. Anything else not presented here, including the op-
eration of devices in mounted positions, is not permitted and must be cleared with the
plant on a case-by-case basis. If the devices are operated in any other manner than as
described within these instruction handbook, then all guarantee and warranty rights are
rendered null and void.

General 1
1.9 Customer service
Our customer service is available to provide you with technical information.

Info on the responsible contact persons is available at all times via telephone, fax, mail or
the Internet.
1.10 Terms used
The term „device“ or the item designation BM4XXX are also used in this documentation
for this Baumüller product „b maXX 4000“. A list of the abbreviations used can be found
in ZAppendix A - Abbreviations– from page 321.
1.11 List of other applicable documents
Instruction 
handbook
Doc No. Part No. Part No.
German English
Instruction Handbook basic unit b maXX 4400, 4600, 4700 (ES) 5.12008 444495 444496
Parameter manual

German English
Parameter manual basic unit b maXX 4400, 4600, 4700 (ES) 5.03039 376339 377548
Instruction hand-
book 
function modules Doc No. Part No. Part No.
German English
Analog I/O module BM4-F-AIO-XX or AIO-XX 5.01045 354844 372665
Digital I/O module BM4-F-DIO/FIO-XX or DIO/FIO-XX 5.01046 354843 372666
Encoder module BM4-F-ENC-XX or ENC-XX 5.01042 354842 372861
Incremental encoder emulation module BM4-F-IEE-XX or IEE-XX 5.02020 354858 376728
SSI encoder emulation module BM4-F-SIE-XX or SIE-XX 5.03056 377123 379049
Instruction hand-
book 
option modules Doc No. Part No. Part No.
German English
DISC-NT slave BM4-O-DNT-XX 5.03007 367670 -
CANopen slave BM4-O-CAN-03 5.02014 368692 368693
CANopen slave programming handbook for controller 5.02065 368694 372860
CANopen over EtherCAT programming handbook 5.07017 413208 432414
CANopen slave for b maXX PLC application handbook 5.03057 376486 376487
b maXX drive PLC 5.01051 366197 354845
b maXX drive PLC application handbook 5.02004 366198 372017
BM4-O-ETH-01, BM4-O-ETH-02, BM4-O-CAN-04 for b maXX PLC 5.03001 366202 372042
BM4-O-ETH-01, BM4-O-ETH-02, BM4-O-CAN-04 CANopen master for 5.03002 366203 372043
b maXX PLC application handbook
CANsync master for b maXX PLC 5.02056 366199 372025

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
1.11 List of other applicable documents

German English
CANsync slave for b maXX 5.02064 366201 372041
CANsync for b maXX PLC application handbook 5.02066 366200 372039
IEI for b maXX PLC 5.02013 366204 372044
PROFIBUS-DP slave for b maXX 5.03040 376488 376489
PROFIBUS-DP slave for b maXX PLC application handbook 5.03058 376490 376491
PROFIBUS-DP slave for b maXX controller programming handbook 5.03045 376757 377294
SERCOS slave module BM4-O-SER-01 5.04012 380910 381069
SERCOS slave module BM4-O-SER-01 parameter handbook 5.04013 381652 381653
EtherCAT slave module BM4-O-ECT-01/ECT-01 5.06003 394953 394954
Ethernet with EtherCAT master for b maXX drive PLC 5.07001 407996 407997
Ethernet with EtherCAT master for b maXX drive PLC application handbook 5.07002 407998 407999
Ethernet with EtherCAT for b maXX drive PLC 5.10018 433997
POWERLINK Controlled Node BM4-O-PLK-01/PLK-01 ES 5.12072 444497 444498
POWERLINK Controlled Node BM4-O-PLK-01 ES application handbook 5.13013 445131 445132

2SAFETY
This section provides an overview of all of the important safety aspects for optimum pro-
tection of personnel as well as for the safe and problem-free operation.
2.1 Contents of the instruction handbook
Each person who is tasked with performing work on or with the device must have read
and understood the instruction handbook before working with the device. This also ap-
plies if the person who is involved with this kind of device or a similar one, or has been
trained by the manufacturer.
2.2 Changes and modifications to the device
In order to prevent hazards and to ensure optimum performance, no changes, additions

or modifications may be undertaken on the device that have not been explicitly approved
by the manufacturer.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
2.3 Usage for the intended purpose
2.3 Usage for the intended purpose
The device is conceived and constructed exclusively for usage compliant with its intended
purpose described in these instruction handbook.
The devices of the model series BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 are either mains rectifier or
active mains rectifier in combination with power modules with servo controller. Devices
are also available in graduated design size and performance classes.
The devices BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 are used exclusively as a converter for con-
trolling a motor.
A device is considered as being used compliant with its intended purpose if all notes and
information of these instruction handbook are adhered to.
WARNING!
Danger arising from usage for an unintended purpose!
Any usage that goes beyond the intended purpose and/or any non-compliant use of
the device can lead to dangerous situations.
Therefore:
m Only use the device compliant with its intended purpose.
m Observe all specifications of these instruction handbook.
m Ensure that only qualified personnel work with/on this device.
m When configuring, ensure that the device is always operated within its specifica-
tions.
m Mount the device on a wall that can sufficiently bear the load.
m The device must always be operated within a control cabinet.
m Ensure that the power supply complies with the stipulated specifications.
m The device may only be operated in a technically flawless condition.
m Only operate the device in combination with components approved by Baumüller
Nürnberg GmbH.
m The device has been developed in such a manner that it fulfills the requirements
of the category C3 according to IEC 61800-3:2012.
m The device is not intended to be connected to the public power supply system. To
operate the device in primary surroundings of the category C2/C1 (residential,
business and commercial areas, directly on a public low-voltage power supply
without an intermediate transformer), special measures to reduce the transient
emissions (line-internal and radiated) must be provided for and certifiable by the
system builder. Otherwise, EMC interference could occur without such additional
measures.

Safety 2
2.4 Responsibility of the operating company
The device will be used in commercial areas. Thus, the proprietor of the device is subject
to the legal work safety regulations.
Along with the notes on work safety in these instruction handbook, the safety, accident
prevention and environmental protection regulations valid for the area of application of
this device must be complied with. Whereby:
m The operating company must inform himself about the applicable work health and safe-
ty regulations and ascertain, in a hazard assessment, any additional hazards that could
arise from the special working conditions in the use area of the device. These must
then be implemented in the form of instruction handbook for operation of the device.
m These instruction handbook must be kept accessible to personnel working with the de-
vice at all times in the immediate vicinity of the device.
m The specifications of the instruction handbook must be adhered to completely and
without exception.
m The device may only be operated in a technically faultless and operationally safe con-
dition.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
2.5 Protective devices
2.5 Protective devices
Protection class
BM441X, BM442X IP 20
BM443X, BM444X IP 20, with a contact-isolated con-
BM463X, BM464X nection in accordance with IP 20,
otherwise IP 10.
BM445X, BM446X, BM447X IP 00
BM465X, BM466X
BM475X, BM476X, BM477X
All devices BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 must be installed in an appropriate control cab-
inet to meet the protection classification required in EN 61800-5-1, chapter 4.2.3.3 (IP 30:
only upper horizontal surfaces; IP 20: all other surfaces).
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury from electrical current!
There is an immediate risk of fatal injury if live electrical parts are contacted.
Therefore:
m The device must be in operated inside of a control cabinet that provides protection
against direct contact of the devices and at least meets the requirements of
EN 61800-5-1, Chapter 4.2.3.3.

Safety 2
2.6 Training of the personnel
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to insufficient qualifications!
Improper handling can lead to significant personal injury and material damage.
Therefore:
m Certain activities can only be performed by the persons stated in the respective
chapters of these instruction handbook.
In these instruction handbook, the following qualifications are stipulated for various areas
of activity:
m Operating personnel
n The drive system may only be operated by persons who have been specially trained,
familiarized and authorized.
n Troubleshooting, maintenance, cleaning, maintenance and replacement may only
be performed by trained or familiarized personnel. These persons must be familiar
with the instruction handbook and act accordingly.
n Initial operation and familiarization may only be performed by qualified personnel.
m Qualified personnel
n Electrical engineers authorized by Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH, and qualified electri-
cians of the customer or a third party who have learned to install and maintain
Baumüller drive systems and are authorized to ground and identify electrical power
circuits and devices in accordance with the safety engineering standards of the com-
pany.
n Qualified personnel have had occupational training or instruction in accordance with
the respective locally applicable safety engineering standards for the upkeep and
use of appropriate safety equipment.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
2.7 Personal protective equipment
2.7 Personal protective equipment
The wearing of personal protective equipment is required when working in order to mini-
mize health and safety risks.
m The protective equipment necessary for each respective type of work shall always be
worn during work.
m The personal safety signs present in each working area must be observed.
Protective work clothing

should be snug-fitting work clothes, with low tearing resistance, narrow sleeves and
with no extending parts. It serves to primarily protect against...
No rings or chains should be worn.
Hard hat
to protect against falling down and flying around objects.
Safety shoes
to protect against heavy objects falling down.
Protective gloves
to protect hands against friction, abrasion, puncturing or more severe injuries, as well
as contact with hot objects.
Wear for special

work.
Protective eye wear

to protect the eyes against flying around objects and sprayed liquids.

Safety 2
2.8 Special hazards
In the following section, the remaining marginal risks will be stated that have been iden-
tified as a result of the hazard analysis.
Observe the safety notes listed here and the warning notes in the further chapters of this
Instruction handbook to reduce health risks and dangerous situations.
Electrical current
DANGER!
There is an immediate risk of fatal injury if live electrical parts are contacted. Damage
to the insulation or individual components can be life-threatening.
Therefore:
m Switch off the electrical power immediately in case of damage to the power supply
insulation.
m Only allow work on the electrical system to be performed by qualified personnel.
m Switch off the current when any kind of work is being performed on the electrical
system and ensure safety before switching on again.
Danger from re-

sidual energy
DANGER!
Stored electric charge.
Discharge time of the rack system = discharge time of the device with the longest DC
link discharge time in the rack system.
See ZElectrical data basic units– from page 63.
Therefore:
m Do not touch electrically live parts before taking into account the discharge time of
the capacitors.
m Pay attention to the corresponding notes on the device.
m If additional capacitors are connected to the DC link, the DC link discharge can
take a much longer time. In this case, the necessary waiting period must itself be
determined or a measurement made as to whether the equipment is de-energized.
This discharge time must be posted, together with an IEC 60417-5036 (2002-10)
warning symbol, on a clearly visible location of the control cabinet.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
2.9 Fire fighting
Moving compo-
nents
WARNING!
Risk of injury from moving components!
Rotating components and/or components moving linearly can result in severe injury.
Therefore:
m Do not touch moving components during operation.
m Do not open any covering during operation.
m The amount of residual mechanical energy depends on the application. Powered
components still turn/move for a certain length of time even after the power supply
has been switched off. Ensure that adequate safety measures are taken.
2.9 Fire fighting
DANGER!
There is a risk of electric shock if an electrically-conductive, fire-extinguishing agent
is used.
Therefore:
m Use the following fire-extinguishing agent:

ABC powder / CO2

Safety 2
2.10 Safety equipment
WARNING!
Risk of fatal injury due to non-functional safety equipment!
Safety equipment provides for the highest level of safety in a facility. Even if safety
equipment makes work processes more awkward, under no circumstances may they
be circumvented. Safety can only be ensured by intact safety equipment.
Therefore:
m Before starting to work, check whether the safety equipment is in good working or-
der and properly installed.
2.11 Conduct in case of danger or accidents
Preventive mea- m Always be prepared for accidents or fire!

sures m Keep first-aid equipment (e.g. first-aid kits, blankets, etc.) and fire extinguishers readily
accessible.
m Familiarize personnel with accident alarm, first aid and rescue equipment.
And if something m Stop operation of the device immediately with an EMERGENCY Stop.
does happen: re- m Initiate first aid measures.
spond properly.
m Evacuate persons from the danger zone.
m Notify the responsible persons at the scene of operations.
m Alarm medical personnel and/or the fire department.
m Keep access routes clear for rescue vehicles.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
2.12 Signs and labels
The following symbols and information signs are located in the working area. They refer
to the immediate vicinity in which they are affixed.
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to unreadable symbols!
Over the course of time, stickers and symbols on the device can become dirty or oth-
erwise unrecognizable.
Therefore:
m Maintain all safety, warning and operating labels on the device in easily readable
condition.
Electrical voltage
Only qualified personnel may work in work areas that identified with this.
Unauthorized persons may not touch working materials marked correspondingly.
DANGER!
Discharge time of the rack system = discharge time of the device with the longest DC
link discharge time in the rack system.
See ZElectrical data basic units– from page 63.
Therefore:
m Do not touch before taking into account the discharge time of the capacitors and
electrically live parts.
m Heed corresponding notes on the equipment.

Safety 2
CAUTION!
Risk of injury due to hot surface!
Therefore:
m Wear protective gloves

NOTE!
When in operation, the top of the device can heat up to temperatures > 70 °C!
Figure 1: Signs and labels BM4X1X

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Figure 2: Signs and labels BM4X3X/BM4X4X

Safety 2
Figure 3: Signs and labels BM4X5X

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Figure 4: Signs and labels BM4X6X, BM4X7X

Safety 2
Signs and labels
devices with 
safety level
NOTE!
Only a device marked with the TÜV Rheinland certification label and the safety label
fulfills a certified safety function within the meaning of PL classification according
ISO 13849 or SIL according EN 61800.
new logo former logo
4400_0012_rev01_int.cdr
Einbau-Einzelleistun
Ostendstr. 80-90 D-90482 Nürnberg
gseinheit
BAUMÜLLER NÜRNBERG GMBH
Typ:
www.baumueller.de
BM4453-FI-01244-
Made in Germany
S01-03
Eingang: 3x400V (480V)
AC 50/60Hz
Ausgang: 3x0...400V (460V)

gseinheit AC 3x150A (125A)

gseinheit Betriebsart: GBK 0..450Hz

Typ: 130% <1min

www.baumueller.de
BM4453-FI-01244-
Made in Germany
Typ:
www.baumueller.de
S01-03 BM4453-FI-01244-
Made in Germany
S01-03
Eingang: 3x400V Art.Nr.:
(480V) AC 50/60Hz Eingang: 3x400V (480V) 06500275
Ausgang: 3x0...400V AC 50/60Hz Ser.Nr.:311035532
(460V) AC 3x150A Ausgang: 3x0...400V (460V)
Betriebsart: GBK (125A) 0..450Hz AC 3x150A (125A)
130% <1min Betriebsart: GBK 0..450Hz
130% <1min
Art.Nr.: 06500275
Ser.Nr.:311035532 Art.Nr.: 06500275
Ser.Nr.:311035532
gseinheit
Typ:
www.baumueller.de
BM4453-FI-01244-
Made in Germany
S01-03
Eingang: 3x400V
(480V) AC 50/60Hz
Ausgang: 3x0...400V
(460V) AC 3x150A
Betriebsart: GBK (125A) 0..450Hz
130% <1min
Art.Nr.: 06500275
Ser.Nr.:311035532
Einbau-Einzelleistungseinheit
Typ: BM4453-FI-01244- S01-03

www.baumueller.de
Made in Germany
Eingang: 3x400V (480V) AC 50/60Hz

Ausgang: 3x0...400V (460V) AC 3x150A (125A) 0..450Hz
Betriebsart: GBK 130% <1min
Art.Nr.: 06500275 Ser.Nr.:311035532
Figure 5: Type code labeling

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358

3 TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Dimensions
The following dimension drawings show the main dimensions of the devices. By means
of the dimension drawings the space requirements within the control cabinet are deter-
mined. The dimension drawings in ZDrilling patterns– from page 147 must be used in or-
der to do the required drilling / segments.
NOTE!
All dimensions in mm.
NOTE!
Only the basic controller has a design cover.
NOTE!
The following devices are shown with design cover. The ES controller is designed
without a design cover. The depth of the device was reduced by 66.5 mm due to this.
It must be considered that the connectors and cables require additional space.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.1 Dimensions
3.1.1 Dimensions BM441X
With design cover Design cover
Without design cover
Figure 6: Dimensions BM441X *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe

ZCooling– from page 61
**: Dimensions specified with design cover. The ES controller is not
equipped with a design cover.

Technical Data 3
3.1.2 Dimensions BM442X
Figure 7: Dimensions BM442X-S/A *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe

ZCooling– from page 61.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.1 Dimensions
Figure 8: Dimensions BM442X-F/C *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.

Technical Data 3
3.1.3 Dimensions BM4X3X
Figure 9: Dimensions BM443X-S/Z, BM443X-A/F *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.1 Dimensions
Figure 10: Dimensions BM443X-C, BM463X-F *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.

Technical Data 3
Figure 11: Dimensions BM444X-S/Z, BM464X-S/Z *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.1 Dimensions
Figure 12: Dimensions BM444X-A/F, BM464X-A/F *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.

Technical Data 3
Figure 13: Dimensions BM445X-S/Z, BM465X-S/Z *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.
***: Width including screw heads.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.1 Dimensions
Figure 14: Dimensions BM445X-A/F, BM465X-A/F *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.
NOTE!
The device BM4X5X-AX-0XXX was extended by about 70 mm downwards with an
additional protective plate against contact.

Technical Data 3
*: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.

Figure 15: Dimensions BM465X-FXX-3XXXX and BM475X-FXX-3XXXX

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.1 Dimensions

Figure 16: Dimensions BM465X-FXX-3XXXX-RYY, BM475X-FXX-3XXXX-RYY

Technical Data 3

Figure 17: Dimensions BM465X-ZXX-3XXXX-[RYY], BM475X-ZXX-3XXXX-[RYY]

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.1 Dimensions
Figure 18: Dimensions BM446X-S/Z *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.

Technical Data 3
Figure 19: Dimensions BM446X-A/F and BM466X-A/F *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.
***: Width including screw heads
NOTE!
The device BM4X6X-AX-0XXX was extended by about 80 mm downwards by an ad-
ditional protective plate against contact.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.1 Dimensions
*: Observe minimum clearance. Observe ZCooling– from page 61.

**: without brake resistor
***: with brake resistor
Figure 20: Dimensions BM466X-FXX-3XXXX and BM476X-FXX-3XXXX

Technical Data 3
*: Observe minimum clearance. Observe ZCooling– from page 61.
Figure 21: Dimensions BM466X-Z-3XXXX and BM476X-Z-3XXXX

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.1 Dimensions
Figure 22: Dimensions BM447X-F, BM477X-F *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.

Technical Data 3
Figure 23: Dimensions BM447X-A *: Observe minimum clearance, Observe ZCooling– from page 61.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.2 Weight
3.2 Weight
Device Dimensions Weight with controller,

(W x H x D) without plug-in modules
BM441X 1) 80 x 347 x 263 mm 4.0/4.4 kg
105.5 x 347 x 263 mm
BM442X 2) 105.5 x 428 x 340 mm 7.0 kg
2)
BM443X 155 x 540 x 340 mm 15.7 kg
BM463X 2)
BM444X 2) 190 x 665 x 374 mm 26.4 kg
BM464X 2)
BM445X 2) 304 x 745 x 380 mm 50.0 kg
BM465X 2)
BM465X-FXX-3XXXX 360 x 604 x 320 mm
BM475X-FXX-3XXXX
BM446X 2) 437 x 920 x 380 mm 70.0 kg
BM466X 2)
BM466X-FXX-3XXXX 490 x 710 x 322 mm
BM476X-FXX-3XXXX
BM447X 3) 580 x 660 x 340 mm 82.0 kg
BM477X 3)
1) The first row specifies the dimensions of the devices BM441X-XXX-00XXX-XX and BM441X-XXX-01XXX-
XX. The second value specifies the dimensions of the device BM441X-XXX-02XXX-XX.
2) Dimensions for the devices BM44XX-S and BM46XX-S. The deviations of the other cooling versions see
ZDimensions– from page 31.
3) The dimensions for the device BM447X-F and BM477X-FXX-3XXXX are specified. The specified depth is
the total depth of the device. See ZFigure 23– on page 49.

Technical Data 3
3.3 Operating requirements
3.3.1 System types
There are three basic types of the current supply systems regarding the grounding, which
conform with DIN VDE0100 part 300 and IEC 60364:
m The TN system has a directly grounded point (system grounding). The cabinet of the
electrical installation is connected via the protective conductors and PE conductors
with this point.
m The TT system has a directly grounded point (system grounding). The cabinet of the
electrical installation is connected with grounding electrodes. The grounding elec-
trodes are separated from system grounding.
m The IT system has no direct connection between the active conductors (L1, L2, L3, N)
and grounded parts (PE). The cabinet of the electrical installation is grounded. The
separation is reached by using an isolating transformer or an independent current
source (generator, battery).
If the low-impedance ground fault is adequate, an upstream fuse within the TN system or
the TT system responds. At a high-impedance ground fault a fuse does not respond. This
ground current (residual currents) can be dangerous. Therefore sensitive circuit breakers
are used for residual current monitoring.
At a ground fault In an IT system there is no ground current. The upstream fuses do not
respond. Therefore the operation procedure is maintained. A second ground fault at an-
other phase leads to residual currents. This can initiate a fuse. In order to detect the first
ground fault a ground leakage monitor is required. In order to detect the second ground
fault a residual current monitoring is required.
Supported system types
NOTICE!
The operation of the BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 devices is possible at IT systems
and at TN / TT systems.
NOTE!
Certain device types are available in type BM4XXX - XIX only. This devices can be
operated on IT, TN/TT systems and grounded delta systems.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.3.2 Requirements to the energy supply / supply system
Supply system BM44XX - XTX 6) Industrial system with a

(see ZSystem types– from BM46XX - XTX 6) direct grounded neutral point or with a
page 51) BM47XX - XTX 6) low impedant grounded neutral point
(TN system or TT system)
BM44XX - XIX Industrial system with a
BM46XX - XIX grounded star point (IT-system), which has no
BM47XX - XIX or high impedance
Industrial system with direct or low impedance
earthed phase junctions (grounded delta wye)
Inductance  BM441X, BM442X min. uk = 0.4 % max. uk = 4 %
(sum of power supply
BM4426, BM443X, BM444X, min. uk = 2.4 % max. uk = 4 %
inductance and choke
BM463X, BM464X
inductance)
BM445X, BM465X, BM475X, min. uk = 4 % max. uk = 6 %
BM446X, BM466X, BM476X,
BM447X, BM477X
Rated supply voltage/-frequency 1) 2) 3 x 400 V
(UAC) device 50/60 Hz
Absolute minimum supply voltage device1) 2) (UAC) 3 x 207 V / 50/60 Hz
Absolute maximum supply voltage device1) 2) (UAC) 3 x 528 V / 50/60 Hz
Absolute minimum frequency5) 47 Hz
Absolute maximum frequency 5) 63 Hz
Overvoltage category III
EN 61800-5-1, chapter. 4.3.6
Harmonics (power supply voltage) THDU b 12 %

EN 61800-3, chapter 5.2.1, chapter 3
Unbalanced power supply voltage max. 3 %

EN 61000-2-4, Tab. 1, class 3
Commutating dips Depth of dip < 40 %, area < 250 % x degrees

EN 61800-3, chapter 5.2.1, class 3
Voltage dips 10 % to 80 % 1)
EN 61800-3:2004 and A1:2012
Voltage variations/-fluctuations +/-10 %

EN 61200-2-4, class 3 +10 % to -15 % at a period of b 1 min
Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) 4) 65 kA
Rated supply voltage / BM444X-S/A, BM445X-S/A, 230 V  10 %
-frequency (UAC) fan 7) BM446X-S/A, 50/60 Hz
BM464X-S/A, BM465X-S/A,
BM466X-S/A
BM447X-A 3 x 400 V  10 %
50/60 Hz
Control voltage 3) (UDC) + 24 V -15 % / +20 %
following EN 61131-2:2008

Technical Data 3
1)
The error „power supply not ready-to-operate“ is generated if the supply voltage falls below UACmin for t > 0.1 s.
2)
Rated voltage is 400 V. 
With lower supply voltages the output power of the device is reduced. See correction factors, in case the operating conditions were
changed ZSupply voltage– on page 57.
3)
The control voltage must accord to PELV (EN 61800-5-1, chapter 3.21) or SELV (EN 61800-5-1, chap. 3.35). 
At control voltage of < 24 V the ventilation power output is reduced. Therefore, it may be necessary, to reduce the output currents as
well.
4)
Required for UL 508C, only.
5)
Rate of change of the power supply frequency 1 Hz/s at a maximum (EN 61000-2-4, class 3).
6)
The connection and operation of a device with the identification BM4XXX-XTXX at an IT system or a grounded delta system, is not
permitted.
7)
Valid for BM444X/BM445X/BM446X/BM464X/BM465X/BM466X cooling versions S and A and BM 447X cooling version A.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.3.3 Motor requirements
Devices BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 are designed to operate three-phase current mo-
tors with a terminal motor voltage of 3 x 350 V (typical for servo motors of Baumüller). De-
vices BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 are designed to operate 3 x 400 V (standard
asynchronous motors and customer-specific motors of Baumüller). The motors must be
operated wye-connected. The rated DC link voltage is 540 VDC. The DC link voltage may
rise up to 780 V to 800 V in braking operation. The connected motor must be designed
for these DC link voltages.
The DC link voltage remains between 640 V and 760 V continuously (not only in the brak-
ing operation), if the BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 power modules are operated at a volt-
age-controlled DC link (e.g. BM51XX). The connected motor must be able to operate at
these voltages continuously.
The device can be used at lower voltages, also (e.g. 3 x 230 V). However, here, the three-
phase current motors must be designed for the operation with power inverters with up to
800 V DC link voltage, because the brake resistor threshold remains (see ZElectrical data
basic units– from page 63). For these reasons three-phase motors with UDC,
rated  540 V must be used, only.

Technical Data 3
3.3.4 Required environmental conditions
Transport temperature range - 25 °C to + 70 °C

Transport climatic category 2K3
EN 60721-3-2
Storage temperature range - 25 °C to + 55 °C

Storage climatic class 1K4
EN 60721-3-1
Operation environment industrial system 1)

Operation temperature range min. 5 °C to max. 55 °C
(rated temperature 40 °C)
Operation climatic class 3K3
EN 60721-3-3
Mounting height 2) absolute altitude up to 2000 m

Humidity (operation) relative humidity: 5 % to 85 % no condensation
EN 60721-3-3 and
absolute humidity: 1 g/m3 to 25 g/m3
Ionizing and non-ionizing radiation lower than measurable range
Vibration, shock and repetitive shock max. 0.5 g during operation
EN 61800-5-1, section 5.2.6.4 Vibration test
Degree of pollution 2
EN 61800-5-1, table 6, Tab. 2
1)
For the operation in an environment of category C2 according to IEC 61800-3:2012, additional measures may be required.The manu-
facturer of the installation / user must provide the following evidence in this case: The additional measures are effective. The specified
limit values of category C2, which are described in IEC 61800-3, are complied with.
2) See correction factors at environmental conditions, which were changed ZMounting height– on page 56.
NOTICE!
Normally, non-conductive pollution occurs. Conductive pollution is unacceptable.
Conductive pollution can lead to the destruction of the device. The customer is re-
sponsible for destructions, which were caused by pollution due to conductive materi-
als or components.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.3.5 Correction factors if the operating conditions are changed
If the devices BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 are operated at operating conditions, which
lead to different correction factors, then all correction factors must be considered by mul-
tiplying them simultaneously to calculate the output power and the output current.
The following correction factors are to be considered if nothing other is specified at the
„Technical data“ of the device:
3.3.5.1 Mounting height
If the devices BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 are operated above an absolute altitude of
1000 m, then the output power must be reduced against the rated power according to the
following curve.
120%
100%
80%
Output power
Rated power
60%
40%
20%
0%
0m 1.000m 2.000m 3.000m 4.000m 5.000m
Mounting height
Figure 24: Reducing of the output power in dependence of the absolute altitude
NOTE!
Baumüller devices, which are provided for the operation at grounded delta systems
or IT supply systems, may have an operating altitude of 2000 m at these systems,
only. If the altitude is higher than 2000 m to 4000 m these devices must be operated
at TN systems and TT systems. Such systems, e. g. can be achieved by using an iso-
lating transformer with a secondary-sided star point.

Technical Data 3
3.3.5.2 Environmental temperature
The devices BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 were designed to be operated at an environ-

mental temperature of TRated = 40 °C. If the devices are operated at temperatures be-
tween 40 °C and 55 °C the permitted output current (IO) must be reduced according to
the following formula:
coolant temperature- 40°C
I O = I O  40°C    1 –  ----------------------------------------------------------------------  0 03 
°C
The coolant temperature complies with the environmental temperature of air-cooled de-
vices, with the water temperature of water-cooled devices and the surface temperature of
the cold plate/mounting panel of devices with cold plate cooling.
3.3.5.3 Supply voltage
Above rated  The rated voltage is 3 x 400 V

supply voltage
When having input voltages above the rated supply voltage the output currents must ac-
cordingly be reduced at a constant output power.
100 %
Output current device
50 %
180 V 400 V 528 V System voltage

Figure 25: Output current in dependence of the input voltage

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Below rated  The rated voltage is 3 x 400 V

supply voltage The output power of the device reduces with lower system voltages.
498 V
Output voltage device
370 V
177 V
System voltage
207 V 400 V 528 V
Figure 26: Reducing the output voltage in dependence with the input voltage
Output power
100 % PRated
Output power device
Continuous operation permit-

ted
51 %
207 V 400 V 528 V

System voltage
Figure 27: Reducing the output power in dependence of the system voltage
The output power of the device is obtained by multiplying the output current with the
output voltage.
SOut = UOut x IOut x 3
It is necessary to reduce the output current to a value between 400 V and 528 V, in or-
der to obtain the specified curve / surface.

Technical Data 3
3.3.6 Coherence between rated current and peak current
m Calculation of the thermal RMS current from the dimensioning cycle
i(t)
I I
3 3
I I
1 1
I I
2 2
t1 t2 t3 t1 t2 t3
t
T
Figure 28: Calculation of the thermal RMS current
k 2 tn 2 t 2 t 2 t
I eff = n = 1 I n  ---
- = I 1  ---1- + I 2  ---2- + I 3  ---3-
T T T T
m Coherence between peak current and rated current 

for the dimensioning of a motion cycle
i(t)
I I
peak peak
t
t peak T + tpeak
T
Figure 29: Coherence between peak current and rated current
t peak I rated 2
----------- =  -----------
-
T  I peak 

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
m Coherence between peak current of drive and the braking peak current
Assumptions: Pshaft, acceleration = Pshaft,braking, cos accelerate = cos braking
I max,phase,acceleration U DC link, braking  1  2

---------------------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------
- ---------------
I max,phase, braking U DC link, acceleration  Motor
 
Typical values:
UDC link, braking = 780 V
UDC link, acceleration = 540 V
Motor = 0.9
Typically resulting in:

Imax,phase,braking = 0.56  Imax,phase,acceleration

Technical Data 3
3.3.7 Cooling
Cooling air temperature 1) min. 0 °C to max. 55 °C

(rated temperature: 40 °C)
Cooling air requirement 2) See ZElectrical data basic units– from page 63
Cooling water temperature 4) min. „Cooling air temperature“ 1)
to max. 40 °C at cold plate devices BM5XXX-CXXX)
Cooling water flow rate 3) 4) 6)
BM443X, BM444X, BM445X, BM446X min. 4 l/min. up to max. 15 l/min.
BM463X, BM464X, BM465X, BM466X min. 4 l/min. up to max. 15 l/min.
BM465X-FXX9, BM466X-FXX9, min. 10 l/min. up to max. 15 l/min
BM4755, BM4766
BM457X, BM477X min. 15 l/min. up to max. 25 l/min.
3)
Cooling water pressure max. 6 bar 5)
Cooling water hysteresis max. 5 K in the static and the dynamic operation
Hot water heating 
l/min powerloss  kW 
(cooling water inlet to cooling water outlet) 3) [K] <14.35 ------------  K  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
kW cooling water flow [l/min]
Pressure loss at the water cooler 3) 0.5 bar at 10 l/min

5)
Mounting board temperature with cold plate min. „Cooling air temperature“ 1) to max. 55 °C
(rated temperature: 40 °C)
at water cooling 4): water outlet temperature 40 °C
surface temperature 42 °C
1)
Air temperature in the entire suction area of the device.
2) The cooling air requirement corresponds at least to that of a free-blowing device. Free-blowing means, that the air inlet and the air outlet
operates unrestricted. With the mounting of the device into a control cabinet it therefore can be necessary to use additional fans, so that
the necessary cooling air requirement is covered. If the necessary cooling air requirement of the power heat sink is not provided, then
the output power of the device has to be reduced.
Figure 30: Cooling air requirement

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3)
Rated flow = 10 l/min
If you have other cooling water flow rates than the ones, which were mentioned above, please contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
The cooling water must meet the following requirements:
pH-value 6.5... 9.5 Manganese (Mn) < 0.05 ppm

Conductivity 50... 600 µS/cm Copper (Cu) < 0.1 ppm
Water hardness (inclusive CaCO3) < 100 ppm Chlorine (Cl2) < 1 ppm
Suspended matters < 10 ppm Chloride (Cl-) < 500 ppm
Particle size < 100 µm Sulfate (SO2-4) < 500 ppm
Ryznar Stability Index (RSI) 5.0 ... 6.0
The corrosion-resistant compared with further materials you can take from the DECHEMA-material tables.
Use a corrosion-resistant and a closed cooling circuit.
4)
In case you refer to UL508C: max. 3 bar. There must be a pressure-relief valve with a threshold pressure of maximum 6 bar in the cool-
ing circulation
5)
Recommendation: 
In order to avoid dew, the temperature of the water inlet is greater or equal to the interior temperature of the device.
With other cooling water temperatures as mentioned above please contact Baumüller Nürnberg.
6)
Notes referring to cold plate
Cold plate is an particularly efficient cooling version. Heat dissipation is made via two contact surfaces. One is in the control cabinet as
a mounting platform or at the machine base. The other one is a cold plate on the rear of the unit. In order to have an optimum heat flow,
there are high demands to this functional surface referring to the surface roughness and the evenness. A light damage of the surface
can lead to a significant deterioration of the heat dissipation to the mounting plate.
The sensitive functional surface therefore must be protected against damage when handling the parts.
7) At BM44XX - FXX, BM44XX - ZXX, BM46XX - FXX -0XXXX, BM46XX - FXX - 3XXXX and BM47XX - FXX - 3XXXX, only
NOTE!
Instead of a continuous flow of the water coolers, it is possible to operate with a tem-
perature-controlled, switched water supply. In this case the customer must install a
control equipment, so that the flow of the water can be enabled or avoided. This con-
trol equipment must read and process the available value „heat sink temperature“ in
the controller. It is recommended to enable water flow, if 58 °C were reached. The
water flow also must be possible to be stopped if it reached 57 °C. The maximum per-
mitted hysteresis of 5 K. Therefore, the closing temperature can be set to 60 °C and
the opening temperature to 55 °C. It is advantageous to set the hysteresis lower, as
the controller is a free parameterizable 2-point controller. The integrated 2-point con-
troller can now directly access the variable „heat sink temperature“.
The temperature controlled, switched water supply is able to use water, which is sig-
nificantly colder. The 2-point hysteresis control of the heat sink temperature avoids
impermissible condensation. This way, more power can be emitted via the heat sink.
This is advantageous, if water-cooled devices are used, which have an additionally
integrated brake resistor (see ZAdditional data referring to water-cooled brake resis-
tors– from page 106).
Contact the local Baumüller office for support concerning configuration of alternative
cooling water temperature control.

Technical Data 3
3.4 Electrical data basic units
3.4.1 Electrical data of the universal units
3.4.1.1 Electrical data BM441X universal units
BM4412- BM4413- BM4414- BM4414-

XTX XTX STX 9) CTX 8)9)
Rated input power 1) 1.9 kVA 3.3 kVA 5.1 kVA 6.9 kVA
Rated input rated current 1) (Ieff) 2.8 A 4.8 A 7.3 A 10.0 A
1)
Total harmonic distortion input current (THDI) 119 % 110 % 109 % 113 %
Current input max. (Ieff) 5.2 A 9.0 A 20.0 A 20.0 A
DC link rated voltage 1 )(U
DC) 540 VDC
DC link capacitance (internal) 110 F 240 F 330 F 330 F
DC link discharge time  80 s 175 s 240 s 240 s
(internal DC link capacitance)
DC link capacitance (external), permitted see ZFigure 32– on page 65
Period between two power up processes 12) at least 60 s
Output voltage 1)2) (UAC) 3 x 0 V to 3 x 370 V
Output frequency at 4 kHz 12) 0 Hz to 450 Hz
Rated output current 1)4)5)6)13) (IAC) at 4 kHz 3) 2.5 A 4.5 A 5.5 A 7.5 A
Output peak current 1)4)5)7)13) (IAC) at 4 kHz 3) 5.0 A 9.0 A 20.0 A 20.0 A
Max. peak current period 7) 60 s 1s
Power input DC link terminals 10) max. 2.0 kW max. 3.0 kW max. 4.3 kW
Brake resistor current, permitted (Î) max. 5.9 A max. 12.0 A
Brake resistor external  130   65 
Brake resistor threshold (Û) 780 V
Brake resistor peak power 4.5 kW 5.0 kW 9.4 kW 9.4 kW
Permitted continuous power  1.0 kW 1.5 kW 3.0 kW 3.0 kW
brake resistor external
Power loss referring to power input 33 W 60 W 80 W 102 W
Power input referring to control voltage max. 60 W
Current of the integrated brake control max. 0.5 A max. 1.0 A

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
1)
The rated value refer to a DC link voltage of 540 V, a control voltage of 24 V and an environmental temperature of 40 °C.
2)
The output voltage is a pulsed DC voltage. The operating range refers to the RMS value of the fundamental wave.

U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
- – 10 V without overmodulation of PWM
 2 
3)
Switching frequency of the inverter (adjustable).
4)
RMS value at an environmental temperature of 40 °C.
5)
At a rated supply voltage the unit provides rated output currents and maximum output currents. At input voltages above the rated supply
voltage the output currents at constant output power have to be reduced accordingly.
Derating of the output current Derating of the output current

Output current [%]
Output current [%]
Supply voltage [V] Supply voltage [V]

Output current [%]
Output current [%]
Supply voltage [V] Supply voltage [V]
Figure 31: Derating of output current BM441X universal units
6)
Between 40° C and 55° C the output current must be reduced. See correction factors at changed operating conditions ZEnvironmental
temperature– on page 57.
7)
The peak output current is supplied for the maximum peak current period for the motor at the first acceleration (cold power unit). The in
fact possible overload time is dependent on the preload of the device and on the heat sink temperature, it is determined by the overload
monitoring of the device.
8) These values are specified for the mounting to a heat-conducting surface with a thermal resistance of 0.115 K/W. The maximum per-
mitted temperature of the cabinet at the measuring point is 75 °C. See ZFigure 82– on page 181.
9)
NOTE!
There are other peak current limits, if BM4414 is in braking operation, only. The fol-
lowing peak currents are possible: 15 A at 4 kHz switching frequency and 10 A at
8 kHz switching frequency

Technical Data 3
10)
The sum of the mean active power output, which is transmitted via the DC link terminals and of the mean active power output, which is
transmitted via the motor terminals, may not exceed 3.0 kW (BM4414-STX) and 4.3 kW (BM4414-CTX).
11)
The specified value is valid only, if no additional DC link capacitance is connected to the DC link terminals. See ZPower on switching
frequency / DC link charging– on page 225 and ZFigure 32– on page 65.
external DC link capacitance [µF]
Maximum power supply voltage [V]
Figure 32: Maximum external DC link capacitance BM441X
12) The
range of the output frequency is based on a stationary operation in the linear range of the PWM, i. e. without overmodulation.
The quality of the generated output voltages depends on the ratio between output frequency and current controller frequency fI-R
( fI-R = 1/cycle time current controller).
The maximum output frequency fmax , generated with high quality, is calculated as follows:
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
Furthermore the controller sets an upper limit for the output frequency of 599 Hz (please contact the responsible Baumüller sales de-
partment, keyword: export restriction).
The range of the output frequency is defined as follows:
PWM frequency Current controller cycle time Range of the output frequency
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
The controller allows the device to generate output voltages with frequencies between fmax and 599 Hz. However the quality of this volt-
ages cannot be guaranteed.
Typical the devices are marked with the max output frequency at 4 kHz switching frequency: 0 ... 450 kHz.
13)
The continuously permitted output current must be reduced complying with ZOutput frequency dependent continuous current derating
BM4XXX– on page 112, if the statical output frequency is lower than 15 Hz and the frequency remains between 0 and 15 Hz for over
5 seconds.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
BM4422 BM4423 BM4424

Rated input power 1) 5.6 kVA 8.6 kVA 11.8 kVA
Rated input current 1)(I
eff) 8.1 A 12.4 A 17.0 A
Total harmonic distortion input current (THD)1) 107 % 109 % 109 %
Current input, max. (Ieff) 15.1 A 23.2 A 31.8 A
Rated DC link voltage 1) (UDC) 540 VDC
DC link capacitance (internal) 470 F 705 F
DC link discharging time (internal DC link capacitance) 340 s 510 s
1)3)
Output voltage (UAC) 3 x 0 V to 3 x 370 V
1)5)6)7) 4)
Rated output current (IAC) at 4 kHz 7.5 A 11.0 A 15.0 A
Rated output current 1)5)6)7) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 6.0 A 8.8 A 12.0 A
1)5)6)8) 4)
Output peak current (IAC) at 4 kHz 15.0 A 22.0 A 30.0 A
Output peak current 1)5)6)8) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 12.0 A 17.6 A 24.0 A
8)
Max. peak current period 60 s
Power input DC link terminals max. 5.0 kW
Brake resistor current, permitted (Î) max. max. max.
9.0 A 13.0 A 18.0 A
Brake resistor external  86   60   44 
Brake resistor peak power 7 kW 10 kW 14 kW
Permitted continuous power  3.4 kW 5 kW 6.8 kW
Power loss referring to power input 102 W 150 W 204 W
Current of the integrated brake control max. 0.5 A

Technical Data 3
BM4425 BM4426- BM4426-
XTX XTX-XXX85
Rated input power 1) 11.8 kVA 13.2 kVA 2) 16.6 kVA 2)
Rated input current 1)(Ieff) 17.0 A 19.0 A 2) 24.0 A 2)
Total harmonic distortion input current (THD)1) 109 % 54 % 2)
Current input, max. (Ieff) 34.0 A 37.0 A 2)
1)3)
Output frequency 11) 0 Hz to 450 Hz
1)5)6)7) 4)
Rated output current (IAC) at 4 kHz 15.0 A 22.5 A 12) 27.0 A 12)
Rated output current 1)5)6)7) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 12.0 A 18.0 A 12) 21.6 A 12)
Output peak current 1)5)6)8) (IAC) at 4 kHz 4) 40.0 A 45.0 A 12)
Output peak current 1)5)6)8) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 32.0 A 36.0 A 12)
Max. peak current period 8) 1s 8s 25 s
Power input DC link terminals max. 5.0 kW
Brake resistor current, permitted (Î) max. 25.0 A
Brake resistor external  32 
Brake resistor peak power 20 kW
Permitted continuous power  6.8 kW
1)
All rated values refer to a DC link voltage of 540 V, a control voltage of 24 V and an environmental temperature of 40 °C.
2) Using the power choke listed in ZPower chokes– on page 300 at a power supply with UK,power supply = 0.4 %.
3)
The output voltage is a pulsed DC voltage. The operating range refers to the RMS of the fundamental wave.
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
- – 10 V without overmodulation of the PWM.
 2 
4)
5)
RMS at an environmental temperature of 40 °C.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
6)
At rated input supply voltage the device supplies the rated- / maximum output currents. At input voltages above the rated supply voltage
the output currents at constant output power have to be reduced, accordingly.

Output current [%]
Output current [%]

Power voltage [V] Power voltage [V]

Output current [%]
Output current [%]
Power voltage [V] Power voltage [V]
Derating of the output current

Output current [%]
Power voltage [V]
Figure 33: Derating the output current BM442X universal units
7) The input current must be reduced between 40 °C and 55 °C, see correction factors at changed operating conditions ZEnvironmental
8)

Technical Data 3
9)
The specified value is only valid, if there is no additional DC link capacitance connected to the DC link terminals. See ZPower on switch-
ing frequency / DC link charging– on page 225and ZFigure 34– on page 69.
7000
6000
external DC link capacitance [µF]
5000
BM 4424, 4425, 4426

4000
3000
BM 4422, 4423
2000
BM 4426-XTX-XXX85
1000
0
200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Maximum power supply voltage [V]
Figure 34: Maximum external DC link capacitance BM442X
10)
The sum of the transferred mean effective power via the DC link terminals and the transferred mean effective power via the motor ter-
minals may not exceed the specified value continuously.
11) The
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
12) The continuously permitted output current must be reduced complying with ZOutput frequency dependent continuous current derating
5 seconds.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
BM4432 BM4433 BM4434 BM4435

Rated input power 1)2) 13.3 kVA 16.8 kVA 26.3 kVA 36.7 kVA
Rated input current 1)2) (Ieff) 19.2 A 24.2 A 38.0 A 53.0 A
Total harmonic distortion input current (THDI) 1)2) 60 % 54 % 57 % 57 %
Input current, max. 2) (Ieff) 37.0 A 45.0 A 71.0 A 71.0 A
Rated DC link voltage 1)(UDC) 540 VDC
DC link discharging time  140 s 210 s 280 s 340 s
DC link capacitance (external), permitted max. 20 mF
Waiting period between two power up processes none
1)3)
Output frequency at 4 kHz10) 0 Hz to 450 Hz
1)5)6)7)13) 4)
Rated output current (IAC) at 4 kHz 22.5 A 30.0 A 45.0 A 60.0 A
1)5)6)8)13) 4)
Output peak current (IAC) at 4 kHz 45.0 A 60.0 A 90.0 A 90.0 A
8)
Power supply DC link terminals 9) max. 10.0 kW
Brake resistor current, permitted (Î) max. 36.0 A max. 50.0 A
Brake resistor external  22   16 
Brake resistor peak power 29 kW 40 kW
Permitted continuous power  10 kW
Power loss referring to power input 300 W 390 W 600 W 840 W
Current of the integrated brake control max. 1.0 A max. 1.0 A
max. 8.0 A 11) 12)

Technical Data 3
1)
2)
Using the power choke listed in ZPower chokes– on page 300 at a power supply with UK,power supply = 0.4 %.
3) The output voltage is a pulsed DC voltage. The operating range refers to the RMS of the fundamental wave. 
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 
4) Switching frequency of the inverter (adjustable).

5)
6) At rated power supply voltage the unit supplies rated / maximum output currents. With input voltages above the rated power supply
voltage the output currents must be reduced at constant output power.
Derating of output current Derating of output current

BM4X32 BM4433
Output current [%]
Output current [%]
Power supply voltage [V] Power supply voltage [V]
Derating of output current Derating of output current

BM4434 BM4435
Output current [%]
Output current [%]

7)
The input current must be reduced between 40 °C and 55 °C. See correction factors at changed operating conditions ZEnvironmental
8)
9) The sum of the mean effective power, which is transmitted via the DC link terminals and the mean effective power at the motor terminals,
may not exceed the specified value continuously.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
10)
The range of the output frequency is based on a stationary operation in the linear range of the PWM, i. e. without overmodulation.
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
11)
See ZExplanation version code– on page 130 at generation 2.
12)
At maximum 4 A, if UL508 C is complied with.
13)
5 seconds.

Technical Data 3
BM4443 BM4444 BM4445 BM4446 13) 16)

Rated input power 1)2) 48 kVA 58 kVA 73 kVA 94 kVA
Rated input current 1)2) (I
eff) 70.0 A 84 A 105 A 136 A
Total harmonic distortion input current 1)2) (THDI) 60 % 59 % 45 % 38 %
Input current, max. 2) (I
eff) 105 A 105 A 133 A 187 A
Rated DC link voltage1) 540 VDC
DC link capacitance (external), permitted see ZPage 227–
1)3)
1)5)6)7)15) 4)
Rated output current (IAC) at 4 kHz 80 A 100 A 130 A 150 A
Rated output current 1)5)6)7)15) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 75 A 72 A 94 A 105 A
1)5)6)8)15) 4)
Output peak current (IAC) at 4 kHz 120 A 130 A 170 A 200 A
Output peak current 1)5)6)8)15) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 90 A 94 A 130 A 150 A
8) 9)
Power supply DC link terminals 11) max. 90 kW
Brake resistor current, permitted (Î) max. 67 A max. 100 A
Brake resistor external v 12  v8
Permitted continuous power  36 kW 45 kW 58 kW 75 kW
Power loss referring to the power input 1080 W 1350 W 1740 W 2000 W
Power input of fan of device referring to 230 VAC 87 W
10)
Current of integrated brake control max. 8.0 A 14)

Cooling air requirement power heat sinks 260 m3/h 210 m3/h
Cooling air requirement internal space 60 m3/h
Requirements to the water cooling see ZPage 61–

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
1)
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 

5)
Derating of the output current BM4444 Derating of the output current BM4444
Output current [%]
Output current [%]
Derating of the output current BM4445 Derating of the output current BM4446
Output current [%]
Output current [%]
7)
8)
9) Peak current can be supplied at a heat sink temperature of <75 °C (BM4X43) and <80 °C (BM4X44), only.
If these heat sink temperature thresholds are exceeded, the output current is automatically derated to the rated current.
10)
For cooling versions S and A, only.
11) The sum of the transmitted mean effective power via the DC link terminals and the mean effective power at the motor terminals, may
not exceed the specified value continuously.
12)
Available at device with type code BM44XX-XX-XXXXX-03 with controller version code 4-yyy-xxx, whereat yyy > 024 and the controller
firmware version must be 3.09 or higher. Switching off a device at a motor short circuit may damage the device.

Technical Data 3
13)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
14)
At a hardware status of < 4006 or if UL508C is complied with: at maximum 4 A
15)
5 seconds.
16)
The motor connection of the device provides a limited short-circuit protection.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
BM4452 BM4453 BM4454

Rated input power 1)2) 75.5 kVA 94.2 kVA 138.6 kVA
Rated input current 1)2) (I ) 109 A 136 A 200 A
eff
Total harmonic distortion input current 1)2) (THDI) 42 % 38 % 38 %
Input current, max. 2) (Ieff) 146 A 182 A 270 A
Rated DC link voltage 1) 540 VDC
Waiting time between two power up processes none
1)3)
1)5)6)7) 4) 14)
Rated output current (IAC) at 4 kHz 120 A 150 A14) 210 A 13)
Rated output current 1)5)6)7) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 96 A14) 116 A14) 150 A 13)
Output peak current 1)5)6)8) (IAC) at 4 kHz 4) 180 A 14) 195 A14) 260 A 13)
Output peak current 1)5)6)8) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 144 A 14) 150 A14) 185 A 13)
Max. peak current period 8) 60 s
Power input DC link terminals max. 110 kW
Brake resistor current, permitted (Î) max. 150 A
Brake resistor external 5
11)
Power input of the device fan referring to 230 VAC 9) 190 W
Cooling air requirement referring to power heat sinks 450 m3/h 450 m3/h 400 m3/h
Cooling air requirement device internal space 135 m3/h 135 m3/h 135 m3/h

Technical Data 3
1)
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 

5)
Derating of output current BM4452 Derating of output current BM4453

Output current [%]
Output current [%]
Derating of output current

BM4454
Output current [%]
Power supply voltage [V]
Figure 37: Reducing of output current BM445X universal units
7)
8) The peak output current is supplied for the maximum peak current period for the motor at the first acceleration (cold power unit). The in
9)
For cooling versions S and A.
10) UL508C is complied with: max. 4.0 A.
11)
See ZMotor requirements– on page 54.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
12)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
13)
With an output frequency lower than 0.5 Hz, the output current may be 80 % at maximum of the rated output current.
14)
5 seconds.

Technical Data 3
BM4462 BM4463 BM446614) 16)

Rated input power 1)2) 164 kVA 204 kVA 238 kVA
Rated input current 1)2)(I
eff) 237 A 295 A 344 A
Total harmonic distortion input current 1)2) (THDI) 43 % 50 % 50 %
Input current max. 2) (Ieff) 320 A 395 A 455 A
DC link discharging time  150 s 280 s
1)3)
1)5)6)7)15) 4)
Rated output current (IAC) at 4 kHz 250 A 300 A 350 A
Rated output current 1)5)6)7)15) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 200 A 240 A 240 A
1)5)6)8)15) 4)
Output peak current (IAC) at 4 kHz 325 A 390 A 450 A
Output peak current 1)5)6)8)15) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 260 A 312 A 312 A
8)
Brake resistor current, permitted (Î) max. 230 A max. 236 A
Brake resistor external  3.4   3.33 
11)
Power loss referring to power input 3960 W 4800 W
Power input of the device fan referring  174 W
to 230 VAC 9)
Cooling air requirement power heat sink 400 m3/h
Cooling air requirement device internal space 200 m3/h

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
1)
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 

5)

Output current [%]
Output current [%]
Derating of output current BM4466

Output current [%]
Figure 38: Reducing of output current BM 446X universal units
7)
8)
9)
10)
If UL508C is complied with: max. 4.0 A.
11) See ZMotor requirements– on page 54.

Technical Data 3
12)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
13)
Using internal brake resistors, the continuous brake resistor power is 5 kW.
14)
The controller firmware version must be 3.10 or higher.
15) The
continuously permitted output current must be reduced complying with ZOutput frequency dependent continuous current derating
5 seconds.
16) The
motor connection of the device provides a limited short-circuit protection.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.4.1.7 Electrical data BM4X7X universal units
BM4472 - A/F BM4473 - A/F

Rated input power 1)2) 328 kVA 412 kVA
Rated input current 1)2) (I ) 474 A 594 A
eff
Total harmonic distortion input current 1)2) (THDI) 54 %
Input current max. 2) (I
eff) 602 A 760 A
DC link rated voltage 1) 540 VDC
DC link capacitance (internal) 19.8 mF
DC link discharging time  150 s
1)3)
Output voltage (UAC) 3 x 0 V bis 3 x 370 V
Output frequency at 4 kHz14) 0 Hz bis 450 Hz
1)5)6)7)13)15) 4)
Rated output current (IAC) at 4 kHz 450 A 615 A
Rated output current 1)5)6)7)13)15) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 338 A 420 A
1)5)6)8)15) 4)
Output peak current (IAC) at 4 kHz 585 A 800 A
Output peak current 1)5)6)8)15) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 439 A 545 A
9)
Power input DC link terminals max. 250 kW max. 315 kW
Brake resistor external  2.6 
12)
Permitted continuous power brake resistor external 180 kW
Power input of the device fan referring to 400 VAC max. 540 W
1)
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 
4)
5)

Technical Data 3
6)
At rated power supply voltage the unit supplies rated / maximum output currents. With input voltages above the rated power supply
voltage the output currents must be reduced at constant output power
Derating of the output current BM4X7X

Output current [%]
Figure 39: Derating the output current BM 447X universal units
7)
temperature– on page 57
8)
Two temperature values may occur (cooling air, which flows through the internal space of the device / cooling air, which flows through
the heat sink). Enter the higher value. 
Example: Rated output current = 150 A environmental temperature = 46 °C
I o = 150A   1

–  46°C - 40°C
--------------------------------  0 03  = 150A  0 82

The output current must be reduced to: 123 A
°C
9)
10) The sum of
the instantaneously drawn power via the DC link terminals and the input power (motor output / motor efficiency) of the motor
at the same time may not exceed the maximum power input of 250 kW and 315 kW.
11) If
UL508C is complied with: max. 4.0 A.
12)
See ZMotor requirements– on page 54.
13)
If UL508C is complied with:
The permitted typical motor output is limited to 295 kW at a maximum. The device BM4473 belongs to the category < 400 HP, < 298
kW ratings complying with table 45.1 of UL508C. Therefore, the short-circuit test using 18k A can be executed. Baumüller does not offer
devices in the class 600 HP, 447 kW with 30 kA short-circuit current in accordance with UL508C.
14) The range of the output frequency is based on a stationary operation in the linear range of the PWM, i. e. without overmodulation.
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
5 seconds.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.4.2 Electrical data BM46XX acceleration units
Acceleration units are developed for a cycle with 1.25 s peak current at a total cycle of
5 s, see ZFigure 29– on page 59. The units are not developed for using at standstill or
output frequencies lower than 10 Hz with peak current. For this units the ZOutput fre-
quency dependent continuous current derating BM4XXX– on page 112 and the ZOutput
frequency dependent maximum current derating BM46XX– on page 113.
NOTE!
The acceleration units require a controller FW version 3.10 or higher!

Technical Data 3
3.4.2.1 Electrical data BM4632 acceleration units
BM4632
Rated input power 1)2) 36,7 kVA
eff) 53,0 A
Distortion factor of the input current 1)2) (THDI) 57 %
eff) 128 A
DC link capacitance (internal) 3000 F
DC link discharging time (internal DC link capacitance) 140 s
Waiting time between two power up processes no
1)3)
1)5)6)7)12) 4)
Rated output current (IAC) at 4 kHz 60 A
Rated output current 1)5)6)7)12) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 48 A
1)5)6)8)12) 4)
Output peak current (IAC) at 4 kHz 120 A
Output peak current 1)5)6)8)12) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 96 A
8)
Max. peak current period 1,25 s
Power input DC link terminals 9) max. 10,0 kW
Brake resistor current, permitted (Î) max. 70,0 A
Brake resistor external  11 
Power loss referring to power input 840 W
Current of integrated brake control max. 8 A 11)
Requirements to water cooling see ZPage 61–

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
1)
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 

5)
Output current [%]
Figure 40: Derating the output current BM4632 acceleration units
7)
8)
9) The sum of the mean effective power, which is transmitted via the DC link terminals and the mean effective power at the motor terminals,
10)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
11) At maximum 4 A, if UL508 C is complied with.
12)
The continuously permitted output current must be reduced complying with ZOutput frequency dependent maximum current derating
BM46XX– on page 113, if the statical output frequency is lower than 15 Hz and the frequency remains between 0 and 15 Hz for over 5
seconds.

Technical Data 3
3.4.2.2 Electrical data BM464X acceleration units
BM4641 BM4642 13)

Rated input power 1)2) 57 KVA 65 kVA
eff) 82 A 95 A
Distortion factor of the input current 1)2) (THDI) 50 % 50 %
eff) 164 A 190 A
1)3)
1)5)6)7)12) 4)
Rated output current 1)5)6)7)12) (IAC) at 8 kHz 4) 64 A 75 A
1)5)6)8)12) 4)
8)
Max. peak current period 1.25 s
Power input DC link terminals 10) max. 60 kW / 120 kW (1 s)
Brake resistor external v8
Power loss referring to power input 1350 W
Power input of the fan of the device referring to 230 VAC 9) 87 W
Requirements to water cooling see ZPage 61–
1)
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 
4)

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
5)
Derating of output current BM4641, BM4642
Output current [%]
Figure 41: Derating the output current BM464X acceleration units
7)
8)
9)
10)
The sum of the mean effective power, which is transmitted via the DC link terminals and the mean effective power at the motor terminals,
11)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
12) The continuously permitted output current must be reduced complying with ZOutput frequency dependent maximum current derating
seconds.
13)

Technical Data 3
BM4650 14) BM465114) BM465214)

Rated input power 1)2) 86 kVA 110 kVA 139 kVA
eff) 125 A 160 A 190 A
Total harmonic distortion input current 1)2) (THDI) 40 %
Input current, max. 2)(I
eff) 250 A 320 A 380 A
1)3)
1)5)6)7)13) 4)
1)5)6)8)13) 4)
8)
Brake resistor external 5
11)
Power input of device fan referring to 230 VAC 9) 190 W
Requirement to the water cooling see ZPage 61–
1)
2)
3)
The output voltage is a pulsed DC voltage. The operating range refers to the RMS of the fundamental wave. 
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4)
5) RMS at an environmental temperature of 40 °C.
6)
Derating of output current BM465X
Output current [%]
7)
8) The peak output current is supplied for the maximum peak current period for the motor at the first acceleration (cold power unit). The in
9)
10)
12)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
13)
The continuously permitted output current must be reduced complying with ZOutput frequency dependent maximum current derating
seconds.
14)
The device is available in cooling type „Z“ and „F“ with standard size (BM46XX-XXX-0XXXX) or short size (BM46XX-XXX-3XXXX).

Technical Data 3
BM466115) BM4662 15)16)

Rated input power 1)2) 170 kVA 200 kVA
Rated input current 1)2)(I ) 240 A 285 A
eff
Total harmonic distortion input current 1)2) (THDI) 50%
Input current max. 2)(Ieff) 480 A 570 A
1)3)
1)5)6)7)14) 4)
1)5)6)8)14) 4)
8)
Brake resistor external  3.4 
11)
Power input of the device fan referring to 230 VAC 9) 174 W
Cooling air requirement power heat sinks 400 m3/h
1)
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4)
6)
Derating of output current BM466X
Output current [%]
7)
8)
9)
10) At
maximum 4 A, if UL508 C is complied with.
11) See
ZMotor requirements– on page 54.
12) The
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
13) The continuously permitted output current must be reduced complying with ZOutput frequency dependent maximum current derating
seconds.
14)
The device is available in cooling type „Z“ and „F“ with standard size (BM46XX-XXX-0XXXX) or short size (BM46XX-XXX-3XXXX).
15) The motor connection of the device provides a limited short-circuit protection.

Technical Data 3
3.4.3 Electrical data BM47XX continuous current units
BM475514) BM476614) BM4773

Eingangs-Bemessungsleistung 1)2) 139 kVA 306 kVA 475 kVA
Eingangs-Bemessungsstrom 1)2) (I ) 190 A 442 A 685 A
eff
Verzerrungsfaktor des Eingangsstroms 1)2) (THDI) 40 % 50% 54 %
Eingangsstrom, max. 2) (I ) 380 A 455 A 772 A
eff
Zwischenkreis-Bemessungsspannung 1) 540 VDC
Zwischenkreiskapazität (intern) 6600 F 13200 µF 19,8 mF
Zwischenkreiskapazität (extern), zulässig see ZPage 227–
Zwischenkreisentladezeit 140 s 280 s 150 s
(interne Zwischenkreiskapazität)
Wartezeit zwischen zwei Einschaltvorgängen no
1)3)
Ausgangsspannung (UAC) 3 x 0 V to 3 x 370 V
Ausgangsfrequenz 12) 0 Hz to 450 Hz
1)5)6)7)13) 4)
Ausgangs-Bemessungsstrom (IAC) bei 4 kHz 260 A 450 A 720 A
Ausgangs-Bemessungsstrom 1)5)6)7)13) (IAC) bei 8 kHz 4) 185 A 305 A 495 A
1)5)6)8)13) 4)
Ausgangs-Spitzenstrom (IAC) bei 4 kHz 260 A 450 A 800 A
Ausgangs-Spitzenstrom 1)5)6)8)13) (IAC) bei 8 kHz 4) 185 A 305 A 545 A
8)
max. Spitzenstromdauer not limited 60 s
Anschlussleistung Zwischenkreisklemmen - max. 160 kW max. 360 kW
Ballaststrom, zulässig (Î) - max. 236 A max. 300 A
Ballastwiderstand extern 5  3,33   2,6 
11)
Ballasteinschaltschwelle (Û) 780 V
Ballastspitzenleistung 120 kW 183 kW 234 kW
zulässige Ballastdauerleistung extern 80 kW 130 kW 180 kW
Verlustleistung bezogen auf Leistungsanschluss 3000 W 4800 W 7800 W
Verlustleistung bezogen auf Steuerspannung max. 75 W max. 80 W max. 170 W
Verlustleistung des Gerätelüfters bezogen auf 230 VAC 9) 190 W 174 W -
10)
Strom der integrierten Bremsenansteuerung max. 8,0 A
Kühlluftbedarf Geräteinnenraum 135 m3/h 400 m3/h -
3
Anforderungen an die Wasserkühlung see 200 m /h -
ZPage 61–
1)
2)

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 
4)
5)

Output current [%]
Output current [%]

Output current [%]
Figure 44: Derating the output current BM47XX continuous current units
7) The input current must be reduced between 40 °C and 55 °C. See correction factors at changed operating conditions ZEnvironmental
8)
9)
10)

Technical Data 3
12)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
13)
5 seconds.
14) The
device is available in cooling type „Z“ and „F“ with standard size (BM47XX-XXX-0XXXX) or short size (BM47XX-XXX-3XXXX).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.5 Electrical data power modules
3.5.1 Electrical data BM442X power modules
BM4422- BM4423 BM4424 BM4425

XXX - - XXX - - XXX - - XXX -
2XXXX 2XXXX 2XXXX 2XXXX
Rated input power 1) 4.3 kW 6.2 kW 8.2 kW 8.2 kW
1)
Rated input current (Ieff) 7.8 A 11.5 A 15.2 A 15.2 A
Input current, max. (Ieff) 15.5 A 23.0 A 30.4 A 40.6 A
1)
Rated DC link voltage (UDC) 540 VDC
DC link capacitance (internal) 470 µF 705 µF
8)
Output frequency at 4 kHz 0 Hz to 450 Hz
1)4)5)6)9) 3)
1)4)6)7)9) 3)
Max. peak current period 7) 60 s 1s
1) All rated values refer to a DC link voltage of 540 VDC and a control voltage of 24 V.
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 
3)

Technical Data 3
6)

Output current [%]
Output current [%]

DC link voltage [V] DC link voltage [V]
Derating of the output current Derating ot the output current

Ausgangsstrom [%]
Output current [%]
Figure 45: Derating the output current BM442X power modules
7)
8)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
9)
5 seconds.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
BM4432- BM4433 - BM4434 - BM4435 -

XXX - XXX - XXX - XXX -
2XXXX 2XXXX 2XXXX 2XXXX
Rated input power 1) 12.0 kW 15.3 kW 23.3 kW 32.3 kW
eff) 22.3 A 28.4 A 43.2 A 59.8 A
Input current, max. (Ieff) 44.7 A 56.8 A 86.4 A 89.7 A
DC link capacitance (internal) 820 µF 1230 µF 1640 µF 2000 µF
8)
1)4)5)6)9) 3)
1)4)6)7)9) 3)
Power input referring to the control voltage max. 88 W
1)
All rated values refer to a DC link voltage of 540 VDC and a control voltage of 24 V.
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 

4)

Technical Data 3
6)

Output current [%]
Output current [%]


Ausgangsstrom [%]
Output current [%]
7)
8)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
9)
5 seconds.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
BM4443- BM4444- BM4445 - BM4446 -

XXX - XXX - XXX - XXX -
2XXXX 2XXXX 2XXXX 2XXXX 9)
Rated input power 1) 41 kW 50 kW 64 kW 84 kW
eff) 76 A 93 A 119 A 155 A
Input current, max. (Ieff) 113 A 120 A 155 A 207 A
10)
Rated output current 1)4)5)7)12) (IAC) at 4 kHz 3) 80 A 100 A 130 A 150 A
1)4)5)7)12) 3)
Rated output current (IAC) at 8 kHz 75 A 72 A 94 A 105 A
Output peak current 1)4)6)7)12) (IAC) at 4 kHz 3) 120 A 130 A 170 A 200 A
1)4)6)7)12) 3)
Output peak current (IAC) at 8 kHz 90 A 94 A 130 A 150 A
Power input of the device fan 87 W
referring to 230 VAC 8)
Current of the integrated brake control max. 8.0 A 11)
Cooling air requirement power heat sinks 260 m³/h 210 m³/h
Cooling air requirement internal space 60 m³/h
1)
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 

4)
6)

Technical Data 3
7)

Output current [%]
Output current [%]


Output current [%]
Output current [%]
8) For cooling versions S and A, only.

9)
Preliminary information: Available at devices with type code BM44XX-XXX-XX3XX-03-4-yyy, whereat yyy > 024 and the controller
firmware version must be 3.09 or higher.
10)
( fI-R = 1/cycle time current controller). The maximum output frequency fmax , generated with high quality, is calculated as follows:
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
partment, keyword: export restriction). The range of the output frequency is defined as follows:
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
11) At a hardware status of < 4006 or if UL508C is complied with: at maximum 4 A
12)
5 seconds.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
BM4452- XXX - BM4453- XXX - BM4454- XXX -

2XXXX 2XXXX 2XXXX
Rated input power 1) 68 kW 85 kW 125 kW
eff) 126 A 158 A 232 A
Input current, max. (Ieff) 164 A 206 A 302 A
DC link capacitance (internal) 3000 µF 6600 µF
Output voltage 1)2) (UAC) 3 x 0 V bis 3 x 370 V
9)
Output frequency at 4 kHz 0 Hz bis 450 Hz
1)4)5)610)) 3)
1)4)5)7)10) 3)
Power loss referring to the power input 1470 W 1860 W 2690 W
Power input of the device fan 190 W
Cooling air requirement power heat sinks 450 m³/h 400 m³/h
Cooling air requirement device internal space 135 m³/h
1)
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 

4)

Technical Data 3
5)
Derating of the output current

Output current [%]
DC link voltage [V]
6)
7)
8)
9)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
5 seconds.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.5.5 Electrical data BM446X power module
BM4462- XXX - 2XXXX BM4463- XXX - 2XXXX

Rated input power 1) 150 kW 180 kW
eff) 278 A 335 A
Input current, max. (Ieff) 392 A 436 A
DC link capacitance (internal) 6000 µF
DC link discharging time  150 s
10)
1)4)5)6)11) 3)
1)4)5)7)11) 3)
Power loss referring to the power input 3230 W 3920 W
Power input of the device fan  174 W
Cooling air requirement power heat sinks 400 m³/h
Cooling air requirement device internal space 200 m³/h
1)
2)
U DC
U AC = 3  0 V to 3   ----------
 2 

4)
voltage the output currents must be reduced at constant output power

Technical Data 3
BM4462-XXX-2XXXX BM4463-XXX-2XXXX
Output current [%]
Output current [%]

7)
8)
9)
If UL508C is complied with: max. 4.0 A.
10)
f I-R
f max = -------- , typical K Pf  18 
K pf
2 kHz 250 µs 0 - 225 Hz
4 kHz/8 kHz 125 µs 0 - 450 Hz
11)
5 seconds.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.6 Additional data referring to water-cooled brake resistors
Technical data
brake resistors
Device version Brake Brake Depth Brake Brake Constants

resistor resistor of peak continuous for calculation
current device power power
1)
PSmax 3) PDmax 2) 3) C1 C2 C3
BM4434-ZIX/FIX-XXXXXR16 16  49 A +20 mm 38 kW 2 kW 0.139 K/W 0.05081 K/Ws -6.7751 s-1
BM4435-ZIX/FIX-XXXXXR16
BM4444-ZIX/FIX-XXXXXR10 10  78 A +35 mm 61 kW 1.5 kW 0.200 K/W 0.01605 K/Ws -0.9169 s-1
BM4445-ZIX/FIX-XXXXXR10
BM4641-ZIX/FIX-XXXXXR10
BM445X-ZIX/FIX-XXXXXR05 5 156 A +35 mm 122 kW 3 kW 0.100 K/W 0.00802 K/Ws -0.9169 s-1
BM465X-ZIX/FIX-XXXXXR05
BM465X-ZIX/FIX-3XXXXR05
BM475X-FIX-3XXXXR05
BM446X-ZIX/FIX-XXXXXR03 3.33  234 A +35 mm 183 kW 5 kW 0.067 K/W 0.00535 K/Ws -0.9169 s-1
BM466X-ZIX/FIX-XXXXXR03
BM466X-ZIX/FIX-3XXXXR03
BM476X-FIX-3XXXXR03
BM447X-FIX-XXXXXR03 3.33  234 A +35 mm 183 kW 3.5 kW 0.067 K/W 0.00535 K/Ws -0.9169 s-1
BM477X-FIX-3XXXXR03
1) The total depth of the device in the cooling version F increases by the specified value (see ZDimensions–
from page 31). At devices of the cooling version Z the dimensions of the device do not change.
2) The DC link voltage must not exceed 800 V.
Calculation of the permitted length of the braking procedure see ZCalculations– from page 107.
3) The mentioned continuous power is reached if the water flow amount is at least 10 l/min. The inlet tempera-
ture may not be greater than 45 °C.
The brake resistor output power diminishes from the rated value to 0, if the inlet temperature increases from
45°C to 60 °C.
NOTE!
The water-cooled brake resistors offer the optimum of power loss, which can be dis-
sipated, at a minimum unit volume. However, 10 % of the brake resistor power is not
dissipated via the cooling water. It is emitted to the environmental air. 
At operation with rated power the brake resistors reach temperatures of 200 °C on
the rear side.

Technical Data 3
Preconditions for the cooling versions F/W (through hole devices):
Provide adequate protection against contact. Install grids around the heat sink and the
resistors. Assure, that enough air can circulate and that no heat accumulation can devel-
op under the protective cover.
Preconditions for cooling version Z (mounting into the control cabinet):
Install the devices into the control cabinet, that no heat accumulation can develop above
the devices. Air circulation must be possible. In spite of air circulation elevated tempera-
tures can occur above the devices. Do not install cables or cable channels above the de-
vices. At the devices BM443X and BM444X do not install the connection cables directly
above the mounting plate of the device, where the hot air rises.
When dimensioning, consider that 10 % of brake resistor power is not dissipated via the
cooling water, but is an additional power loss, which heats the cabinet. Provide an ade-
quate fresh air supply.
Calculations Precondition for calculation:

The brake power of the internal brake resistors must decrease straight proportional from
the brake peak power to 0.
The brake power time area A must be converted in an equivalent triangular time area. The
resulting parameters PS and ton must be used for the further calculations.
on on
Figure 50: Conversion brake power time area in triangular time area
1 1
A = t 1  P S + ---  t 2  P S = ---  t on  P S
2 2

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
brake
on_1 off_1 on_2 off_2 on_n off_n on_1
cycle

Figure 51: Braking cycle
PD Average continuous brake power of one cycle
PDmax Maximum continuous brake power, see ZTechnical data brake resistors–
on page 106
n Number of brake operations within one cycle
PS_1 to PS_n Brake peak power, numbered in chronological order
ton_1 to ton_n Brake time periods
toff_1 to toff_n Off time periods, between the brake time periods
Tcycle total cycle
C1, C2, C3 Constants, see ZTechnical data brake resistors– on page 106

Technical Data 3
Start
Please contact
The internal brake resistor
Baumüller PS_n  PSmax no
cannot be used for this
if Ps_n  PSmax and ton_n  1 s application
ton_1 ... ton_n  1 s
yes
n n
T cycle =  t on_n +  t off_n
1 1
1  P s_1  t on_1 + ......+  P s_n  t on_n 

P D = ---  --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 T cycle
The internal brake resistor

no
PD  PDmax cannot be used for this
application
yes
TM = PD  C1
Start value T0 = PD  C1
T 1 = T 0 + C 2  P s_1  t on_1
C 3  t off_1
T2 =  T1 – TM   e + T M + C 2  P s_2  t on_2

C 3  t off_n-1
Tn =  Tn – 1 – TM   e + T M + C 2  P s_n  t on_n
C 3  t off_n
Tn + 1 =  Tn – TM   e + TM
T = Tn+1 - T0
T > 20 K T < 0 K

Increase T0 0  T  20 K Decrease T0
e.g. + 10 K, e.g. - 10 K,
followed by the recalculation followed by the recalculation
of all values of all values
The internal brake resistor can be used if T1 to Tn  400 K
End

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Example for the calculation of BM4446
Technical data see brake resistors on ZPage 106–.
Device type Peak Continuous Constants

power power for calculation
PSmax 3) PDmax 2) 3) C1 C2 C3
BM4446-ZIX/FIX-XXXXXR10 61 kW 1.5 kW 0.2 K/W 0.01605 K/Ws -0.9169 s-1
n =5, see brake cycle ZFigure 51– on page 108
PS ton toff
PS_1 = 20 kW < 61 kW ton_1 = 0.15 s < 1 s toff_1 = 1.11 s
n n
Tcycle =  t on _n +  t off _n = 5 0.15s + 1.11s + 1.79s + 6.85s + 1.85s + 5.65s = 18 s
1 1
 P s_1  t ein_1 + ......+  P s_n  t off _n  1  20kW + 13kW + 20kW + 23kW + 24kW   0 15s
PD =D = 1---  ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- = ---  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2 T cycle 2 18s
= 0.417 kW = 417 W < PDmax < 1.5 kW internal brake resistor can be used
TM = P0 C1 = 417 W 0.2 K/W = 83.4 K
Start value: T0 = P0 C1 = 417 W 0.2 K/W = 83.4 K
T1 = T0 + C2 Ps_1 ton_1 = 83.4 K + 0.01605 K/Ws 20 000 W 0.15 s = 131.55 K
C 3  t off _1
T2 = =  T1 – TM   e + T M + C 2  P s_2  t on _2
–1
· – 0,9169s  1,11s
= =  131 ,55K – 83,4K   e + 83,4K + 0,01605K/Ws  13000W  0,15s = 132.1 K

Technical Data 3
C 3  t off _2
T3 = =  T 2 – T M   e + T M + C 2  P s_3  t on _3
–1
· – 0,9169s  1,79s
= =  132 ,06K – 83,4K   e + 83,4K + 0,01605K/Ws  20000W  0,15s = 140.98 K
C 3  t off _3
T4 = T4 =  T3 – TM   e + T M + C 2  P s_4  t on _4
–1
· – 0,9169s  6,85s
= =  140 ,92K – 83,4K   e + 83,4K + 0,01605K/Ws  23000W  0,15s = 138.88 K
C 3  t off _4
T5 = =  T 4 – T M   e + T M + C 2  P s_5  t on _5
–1
· – 0,9169s  1 ,85s
= =  138 ,81K – 83,4K   e + 83,4K + 0,01605K/Ws  24000W  0,15s = 151.35 K
C 3  t off _5 –1
· – 0,9169s  5,65 s
T6 = =  T 5 – T M   e + T M =  151 ,29K – 83,4K   e + 83,4K
–1
· – 0,9169s  5 ,65s
= =  151 ,29K – 83,4K   e + 83,4K = 83.78 K
T = T6 - T0 = 83.78 K - 83.4 K = 0.38 K
PD = 0,417 kW < 1,5 kW and
0 K  T = 0,38 K 20 K and
T1 to T5  400 K
 The internal brake resistor can be used for this application.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.7 Output frequency dependent continuous current derating BM4XXX
3.7 Output frequency dependent continuous current derating BM4XXX
The specified rated currents of all Baumüller devices are permitted continuously. The
electrical output frequency in S1 operation is permitted from 15 Hz onwards. The contin-
uously permitted output current must be reduced complying with the following character-
istic curve, if the statical output frequency is lower than 15 Hz and the frequency remains
between 0 and 15 Hz for more than 5 seconds.
Examples:
n Speed control operations without positioning.
n Standstill operations, if current is required to keep a torque / a force.
n At operations, if it is likely that the mechanics block, for example when starting cold ex-
truders.
The following operations are not affected:
n Typical positioning operations.
n Operating motors, which use an operating brake at standstill.
n Operations, where the higher-level control has a standstill and block monitoring.
The use of Irated is permitted, as long as the derating range is passed through quickly
enough. The frequency change must be 15 Hz/s.
Derating of the motor-sided output current I of the inverter against the rated output current
Irated is dependent on the static output frequency f of the inverter.
I
Irated
Statical output frequency of inverter f

Figure 52: Continuous current derating at a statical output frequency < 15 Hz

Technical Data 3
3.8 Output frequency dependent maximum current derating BM46XX
For protection of BM46XX devices (acceleration units) at output frequencies below 10 Hz

the maximum current of the drive is limited and the PWM frequency is reduced by half
(e. g. from 4 kHz to 2 kHz or from 8 kHz to 4 kHz).
Max. current drive

%
Output peak
100
4000_0753_rev01_int
current
75
0 10 Hz
Output frequency
Automatical reduction of the
PWM frequency to 4/2 kHz
Figure 53: Reduction BM46XX max. current and PWM frequency at output frequencies < 10 Hz
The maximum current of the drive must be limited more severely at output frequencies
below 10 Hz if no PWM frequency reduction is possible.
Max. current drive

Max. drive current available P19.5
%
Output peak
100
5000_0326_rev01_int
current P6.25
50
Hz
0 10 Hz
Output frequency
Figure 54: Reduction BM46XX only max. current at output frequencies < 10 Hz

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
3.9 Overload monitoring modes
3.9 Overload monitoring modes
Overview of devices and their associated overload monitoring modes
Standard devices
Ixt types PT1 model Integration
model
Device identification
Size 1 BM4412, BM4413,
BM441X BM4414
Size 2 BM4420, BM4421,
BM442X BM4422, BM4423,
BM4424, BM4425,
BM4426
Size 3 BM4432, BM4433,
BM443X BM4434, BM4435
Size 4 BM4442, BM4443, BM4446 *)
BM444X BM4444, BM4445
Size 5 BM4452, BM4453,
BM445X BM4454
Size 6 BM4462, BM4463, BM4464
BM446X BM4465, BM4466
Size 7 BM4473 BM4472
BM447X
*)
Temperature model additionally to the integration model.
Special devices
Ixt types PT1 model Integration
model
Device identification
BM46XX BM46XX
BM47XX no Ixt monitoring is executed

4 DESIGN AND OPERATION
The devices BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 consist of a power unit and a controller part
within one housing.
Power unit Controller part

standard controller or ES controller
Design cover
(only standard controller)
Standard controller
BM4XXX-XXX-XX1XX
BM4XXX-XXX-XX2XX
BM4XXX-XXX-XX3XX
ES controller
BM4XXX-XXX-XX4XX
BM4XXX-XXX-XX5XX
The rated current of the devices reach from 2.5 A to 720 A. The devices differ in size, pow-
er, equipment (hard- and software) and cooling types, for further information refer to
ZType code– from page 126.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4.1 Functioning
4.1 Functioning
Basic unit The present alternating voltage at the three-phase system is converted into direct voltage
by the input sided rectifier. The DC link capacitors smooth this DC link direct voltage. The
output sided inverter generates a three-phase system from the direct voltage with variable
frequency and voltage for the supply of the connected motor.
Additionally you can draw d. c. from the device via the DC link connections.
Power module The output sided inverter generates a three-phase system via the DC link connection
from the direct voltage with variable frequency and voltage for the supply of the connected
motor.
BM4400 BM4400 are universal converters, for achieving electrical drives in industrial applications.
BM4400 offers the largest configuration possibilities as well as the most available options.
BM4600 BM4600 (acceleration units) are especially developed servo drives derived from BM4400
for acceleration applications. Characteristic for these devices is, that the peak current is
twice as large as the rated current, even at large output currents. The devices were de-
veloped for a cycle, which could provide the peak current for 1.25 s at a whole cycle du-
ration of 5 s according to ZFigure 29– on page 59.
This units are not developed for peak current using at standstill or output frequencies low-
er than 10 Hz. For this units the ZOutput frequency dependent maximum current derating
BM46XX– from page 113 is valid.
BM4700 BM4700 (continuous current units) are servo converters especially developed for main
drives, derived from BM4400. The devices were developed to maximize the available rat-
ed current by water cooling. For this reason these devices are only available with water
cooling (cooling type -F and -Z) and with none peak current (only BM5773 with low peak
current).
Controller unit The power unit is controlled by the controller unit. You can operate the controller part ei-
ther with the operating software WinBASS II (up to FW 3.09) or ProDrive (from FW 3.07)
or via a PLC or via a field bus and PLC.
NOTE!
Only the operation with ProDrive is described. If the software is not available, please
contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH or visit our Website www.baumueller.de for
download.

Design and Operation 4
4.2 Controller
2 controller types with essential differences are available:

m Standard controller with plug-in slots to enlarge the controller functionality with function
and option modules, e.g. encoder modules, analog inputs/outputs or field bus connec-
tions.
m ES controller with not exchangeable function and option modules.
NOTE!
Only the controller part without function/option modules is described in this Instruc-
tion handbook. A corresponding instruction handbook is available for each function/
option module, see ZList of other applicable documents– from page 13.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4.2 Controller
4.2.1 Standard controller
Following types of the controller part are available:
Single row
This version is a 1-row equipped This version is a 1-row equipped
controller unit in a 3-rowed controller unit in a 2-rowed instal-
installation space. lation space.
Controller interface RS232 or Controller interface RS232 or

Ethernet. Ethernet.
This controller unit is available This controller unit is available

for every 4000 except for the  only in the 
BM441X-XXX-X0XXX and BM441X-XXX-X0XXX.
BM441X-XXX-X1XXX.
2-rowed
This version is a 2-row equipped This version is a 2-row equipped
controller unit in a 3-rowed controller unit in a 2-rowed instal-
installation space. lation space.
Controller interface RS232 or Controller interface RS232 or

Ethernet. Ethernet.
This controller unit is available This controller unit is available

for every BM4000 except for the  only in the 
BM441X-XXX-X0XXX and BM441X-XXX-X1XXX.
BM441X-XXX-X1XXX.
3-rowed
This version is a 3-row equipped
controller unit in a 3-rowed
installation space.
Controller interface RS232 or

Ethernet.
This controller unit is available

for every BM4000.
In case you order a BM441X

with this controller unit, you will
receive the device BM441X-
XXX-X2XXX.

Slots In slots of the controller unit functional- or optional modules are plugged, which extend
the functionality of the controller unit. 
Each slot is identified by a code letter.
A The controller communicates via a functional module bus with plug-in modules in
these slots.
B
1-, 2- and 3-rowed
Slot D can initiate an interrupt. Therewith slot D is particularly suitable for measur-
C ing modules.
D
Optional modules can not be inserted into these slots.
E
F Controller module, not exchangeable with RS232 or Ethernet interface
G The controller communicates via the BACI-bus with plug-in modules in these slots.
2- and 3-rowed
H
Function modules can not be inserted into these slots.
J The controller communicates via the BACI-bus with plug-in modules in these slots.
K
3-rowed
Function modules can not be inserted into these slots.

L
M
NOTICE!
Plug-in module, which has not been manufactured from Baumüller Nürnberg
GmbH. Modules of other manufacturers can damage/destroy the device.
Only use BM4-F-XXX- and BM4-O-XXX-plug-in modules.
Dependable of the existing controller unit version on your device you can retrofit optional
plug-in modules (functional modules and optional modules).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4.2 Controller
Combinations function modules/option modules

Function modules Option modules
BM4-O-ETH-02* (Ethernet + CANopen master)
BM4-O-ECT-02* (Ethernet + EtherCAT master)

BM4-F-UME-XX (mains voltage measurement)
BM4-O-ECT-03* (Ethernet + EtherCAT cluster)

BM4-F-IEE-XX (icremental encoder emulation)
BM4-O-ECT-01 (EtherCAT slave) for controller
BM4-O-IEI-XX* (incremental counter module)

(encoder 1 for motor control recommended)
(POWERLINK Controlled Node) für Regler
BM4-O-ECT-01* (EtherCAT slave) for PLC

BM4-F-SIE-XX (SSI encoder emulation)
BM4-O-EIP-01 (Ethernet-IP) für Regler
BM4-O-CAN-04* (CANopen master)

BM4-O-CAN-03 (CANopen slave)
BM4-F-AIO-02/03/04 (analog I/O)
BM4-O-PRO-01 (Profibus slave)

BM4-O-SER-XX (Sercos slave)
BM4-F-FIO-XX (fast digital I/O)
BM4-F-ENC-XX (encoder 2)
BM4-F-AIO-01 (analog I/O)
BM4-O-ETH-01* (Ethernet)
BM4-F-DIO-XX (digital I/O)
BM4-O-PLC-XX (SPS)
BM4-F-ENC-XX 
BM4-O-PLK-01 
A X - - o o o - o o - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
B - X - o o o - X o - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
C - - - o o o V - o - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D - - - o X X - - X - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
E - - X X o o - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
F Controller unit
G - - - - - - - - - o o o o o o o X X X X X X X
H - - - - - - - - - X X X X X X X o - o o o o o
J - - - - - - - - - - P P - - - - o o o o - - -
K - - - - - - - - - - P P - - - - o o o o o o o
L - - - - - - - - - - P P - - - - o o o o o o o
M - - - - - - - - - - P P - - - - o o o o o o o
X: preferred slot
 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH recommends, in order to reach the highest functional range, to
insert the plug-in modules into these slots.
o: possible slot

 only if the preferred slot is occupied, we recommend in order to reach the highest functional
range, to insert the plug-in modules into this slot.
P: only possible, if on slot G or H a PLC module (PLC) is plugged and the PLC (and not the
controller) operates the communication to the field bus slave module.
Steckkarten_Rev20_e
V: dependent on controller hardware
- not possible - card doesn’t work in this slot.
* precondition for these cards is an inserted PLC module.
NOTE!
Only 2 analog outputs can be parametrized or linked even more than one AIO module
is plugged.

NOTE
EtherCAT option modules must not be plugged in slot J of a 3-rowed controller unit,
because the module can be damaged.
In case another BM4X-X-XXX plug-in module is plugged in an unsuitable slot, it will
not operate. We have made sure, that neither the module nor the device are dam-
aged.
4.2.2 ES controller
The controller is ordered with the desired function/option modules. The modules cannot
be changed later.
Refer to ZType code– from page 126.
Following controller part types are available:
narrow
In this type up to 5 additional
function/option modules can be
installed.

Ethernet.

only in the 
BM441X-XXX-X1XXX.
wide
In this type up to 5 additional
function/option modules can be
installed.

Ethernet.

for every BM4000.

for every BM4000 except for the 
BM441X-XXX-X0XXX and
BM441X-XXX-X1XXX.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4.2 Controller
Position of Function/option modules enlarge the controller functionality. All modules are permanently
function/option installed and cannot be exchanged.
modules
Each slot is identified by a code letter
A Function module, option

B
C
D
E Analog input/outputs BM-F-AIO-01
F Controller unit with RS232 or Ethernet interface
G Field bus interface, option
H Option module, option
Combinations function/option modules
Function modules Option modules

BM4-F-AIO-02/03/04 (analog I/O)
(POWERLINK Controlled Node) 

(incremental encoder emulation)
for motor control recommended
BM4-F-FIO-XX (fast digital I/O)
(CANopen slave) for controller

(EtherCAT slave) for controller
(Profibus slave) for controller

BM4-F-ENC-XX (encoder 2)
(VARAN slave) for controller
(Sercos slave) for controller

BM4-F-AIO-01 (analog I/O)
BM4-F-DIO-XX (digital I/O)
(Ethernet-IP) for controller

(SSI encoder emulation)
BM4-O-PLC-XX (SPS) *
BM4-O-VAR-01 *
BM4-F-ENC-XX 
BM4-O-PRO-XX
BM4-O-SER-XX
BM4-O-CAN-03
BM4-F-IEE-XX 
BM4-F-SIE-XX 
BM4-O-ECT-01
BM4-O-PLK-01
BM4-O-EIP-01 
for controller
(encoder 1)
A X - - o o o - o - - - - - - - -
B - X - o o o - X - - - - - - - -
C - - - o o o X - - - - - - - - -
D - - - X X X - - - - - - - - - -
E - - F - - - - - - - - - - - - -
F Controller Unit with RS232- or Ethernet interface
G - - - - - - - - X - - - - X - -
H - - - - - - - - - X X X X - X X
Steckkarten_ES_Rev01_e X: prefered slot
F: permanently installed
o: possible slot, only the prefered slot is occupied
-: not possible
*: in preparation

NOTE!
Only 2 analog outputs can be parametrized or linked even more than one AIO module
is available.
4.2.3 Encoder modules slot/position A and B
There can be different encoder modules In slot/position A and B, see also ZType code–
from page 126.
Here is a choice of encoders, which you can connect to the encoder modules:
Identification Encoder module Encoder type Connectable encoders

examples
BM4-F-ENC-01 Resolver module Resolver, transmission ratio: 0.5
BM4-F-ENC-11 Resolver reduced level Resolver, transmission ratio: 0.28
BM4-F-ENC-21 Resolver module Resolver, transmission ratio: 0.5

replaces BM4-F-ENC-01
BM4-F-ENC-02 Sine-cosine encoder  Sine-cosine encoder singleturn Stegmann Stegmann
module with Hiperface® inter- SCS60/70 SRS50/60
face
Sine-cosine encoder multiturn Stegmann Stegmann
SCM50/60 SRM50/60
BM4-F-ENC-12 Sine-cosine encoder  Sine-cosine encoder singleturn Stegmann Stegmann
module with Hiperface® inter- SCS60/70 SRS50/60
face without termination in
Sine-cosine encoder multiturn Stegmann Stegmann
communication
SCM50/60 SRM50/60
BM4-F-ENC-03 5V-square wave incremental 5 V-square wave incremental Heidenhain SickSteg-
encoder module encoder, RS422 output signals ROD 426 mann DRS60
(TTL)
BM4-F-ENC-04 Sine-cosine incremental 5 V sine-cosine encoder, output sig- Heidenhain Hengstler 
encoder module with zero- nals ~1Vss ROD 486 RIS 58
point sensing
BM4-F-ENC-05 Sine-cosine encoder  Sine-cosine encoder singleturn Heidenhain Heidenhain
module with EnDat® 2.1 Sine-cosine encoder multiturn ECN 413 ECN 113
interface Length measurement systems EQN 425 EQN 1325
LC 481 LC 181
BM4-F-ENC-06 Encoder module with  Encoder for absolute position sens- Heidenhain Heidenhain
EnDat® 2.2 interface ing with SSI interface ECN 1325 EQN 1337
singleturn multiturn
BM4-F-ENC-07 Sine-cosine encoder  Sine-cosine encoder, output signals SIKO
module with SSI interface ~1Vss, external encoder supply AEA111

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4.3 Interconnect devices
Identification Encoder module Encoder type Connectable encoders

examples
BM4-F-ENC-17 Sine-cosine encoder  5 V-sine-cosine encoder, output sig- Baumer-Hüb-
module with SSI interface and nals ~1Vss ner
5 V power supply MHGA400
BM4-F-ENC-27 Encoder module with SSI SSI encoder with digital output sig- MTS-Sensors
interface and  nals and 24 V supply Temposonics
5 V power supply
BM4-F-ENC-08 Sine-cosine encoder 5 V-sine-cosine encoder,  Heidenhain Heidenhain
module with commutation and incremental signals ~1Vss,  ERN1185 ERN1387
zero-point sensing commutation signals ~1 Vss
4.3 Interconnect devices
The device is part of the Baumüller series b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 and can
be connected together with other Baumüller devices.
Because of the many possible combinations and of the many applications that can be op-
erated by b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 , we have refrained from drawing up a
guide for the interconnection of the devices in written form. Please contact the for you re-
sponsible sales department or the for you responsible employees of the application de-
partment, to discuss your concrete questions on the requirements to develop together a
solution for your problem.
4.3.1 Mix mode BM443X generation 1 and 2
NOTE!
Read the version code to identify BM443X generation 1 or generation 2, refer to ZEx-
planation version code– on page 130.
In principle, BM443X generation 1 and 2 can be operated in mix mode.

The prerequisites are:
n A waiting time of 6 s must be observed before the drive can be enabled (pulse enable,
enabling the torque)
n The total DC link capacitance of all connected devices must be lower than 20 mF.
NOTE!
When replacing a BM443X generation 1 by a generation 2 device the fuses must be
adjusted as well, refer to ZFuses BM4X3X– from page 280.

4.4 Type plate
On the type plate you will find, besides others, the type code of the device.
Figure 55: Position of type plate

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4.5 Type code
4.5 Type code
NOTE!
The type code of the standard controller is only valid for the basic unit without plug-
in modules. Each plug-in module has its own type code.
The type code has the form:

BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX.
Directly behind the type code is the version code
(- XXXX - X - XXX - XXX).
4.5.1 Explanation type code
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Device generation
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Type

4 Vector controller with and without encoder feedback 
(closed loop / open loop), universal units
6 Vector controller like 4, acceleration unit
7 Vector controller like 4, continuous current unit, water-cooled
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Size of housing

1 to 7 (from housing size 1 there are two different wide versions)
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Current grading (output rated current)
0 to 6 (current value is dependent on the size of housing)
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Cooling type

S air-cooled with air supply and with air outlet in the control cabinet
A air-cooled with air supply and air outlet outside the control cabinet 
water-cooled with water cooler in the control cabinet
Z water-cooled with water cooler outside the control cabinet 
F cooling via mounting wall of the control cabinet (cold plate)
C
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Power supply system

T TN or TT system
I IT system, „Grounded delta“, TN or TT system

BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Safety relay
0 No module
1 Module with one relay and high current contacts
2 Module with two relays and high current contacts
3 Module with one relay and low current contacts
4 Module with two relays and low current contacts
5 Module with one relay and all current contacts
6 Module with two relays and all current contacts
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Hardware type/power unit type

0 Mains inverter and active mains inverter 
with brake resistor transistor UDC = 540 V
1 Mains inverter and active mains inverter with 
brake resistor transistor Upower supply =230 V ±10 %, UDC =310 V
2 Power module (only output sided inverter). 
Operation as power module, UDC = 540 V
with brake resistor transistor UDC = 540 V 
short model for BM465X, BM466X, BM475X and BM476X
without brake resistor transistor UDC = 540 V
without brake resistor transistor UDC = 540 V 
short model for BM465X, BM466X, BM475X and BM476X
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Type of controller box

0 No modules can be plugged, 1 row
1 Modules in slots A to H pluggable 
(standard controller or ES controller), 2 rows
2 Modules in slots A to M pluggable (standard controller), 3 rows
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Controller hardware type 

(internal information Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
0 Controller without 7 segment display (RS232 interface)
1 Controller without 7 segment display (RS232 interface)
2 Controller with 7 segment display (RS232 interface)
3 Controller with 7 segment display (Ethernet interface)
4 ES controller with 7 segment display (RS232 interface)
5 ES controller with 7 segment display (Ethernet interface)
6 „SET“ controller with 7 segment display (RS232 interface)
7 „SET“ controller with 7 segment display (Ethernet interface)
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Special design
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Brake resistor option

R16 Brake resistor with 16 
R03 Brake resistor with 3 

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4.5 Type code
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX ES controller field bus interface, position G
00 No field bus
10 EtherCAT for controller, SoE, standard see BM4-O-ECT-01
11 EtherCAT for controller, CoE, standard
12 EtherCAT for PLC, CoE
14 EtherCAT for controller, SoE,
special version 16 bit ramp function generator
20 CANopen see BM4-O-CAN-03
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX ES controller function module, position A

BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX ES controller function module, position B
0 No function module
A Resolver see BM4-F-ENC-21
B SinCos Hiperface® see BM4-F-ENC-02
C Square ware incremental encoder see BM4-F-ENC-03
D SinCos with reference point detection see BM4-F-ENC-04
E SinCos with EnDat 2.1 see BM4-F-ENC-05
F Absolute value encoder EnDat 2.2 see BM4-F-ENC-06
G SinCos with SSi, 5 V external see BM4-F-ENC-07
H SinCos with reference point detection see BM4-F-ENC-08
I SinCos Hiperface without terminal resistance 
within RS485 communication see BM4-F-ENC-12
J Square wave incremental encoder without cable- 
break detection see BM4-F-ENC-13
K SinCos with EnDat 2.1 reference track see BM4-F-ENC-15
L SinCos with SSi, 5 V internal see BM4-F-ENC-17
M Digital IO (4 x IN, 4 x OUT) see BM4-F-DIO-01
N Fast digital IO (4 x IN, 4 x OUT) see BM4-F-FIO-01
O Analog IO (2 x IN, 2 x OUT), 16 bit see BM4-F-AIO-02
P Analog IO (2 x IN, 2 x OUT), 12 bit see BM4-F-AIO-03
Q Analog I/O (2x In-16Bit, 4-20mA / 2x Out-16Bit) BM4-F-AIO-04
R Square wave encoder emulation see BM4-F-IEE-01
S Square wave encoder emulation see BM4-F-IEE-02
T SSI encoder emulation see BM4-F-SIE-01
U Digital I/O without PE connection (4x IN,4x OUT) BM4-F-DIO-11
Fast digital I/O without PE connection  
V (4x IN,4x OUT) see BM4-F-FIO-11
W SSI encoder with 24 V see BM4-F-ENC-27
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX ES controller function module, position C

BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX ES controller function module, position D
0 No function module
M Digital IO (4 x IN, 4 x OUT) see BM4-F-DIO-01
N Fast digital IO (4 x IN, 4 x OUT) see BM4-F-FIO-01
O Analog IO (2 x IN, 2 x OUT), 16 bit see BM4-F-AIO-02
P Analog IO (2 x IN, 2 x OUT), 12 bit see BM4-F-AIO-03
Q Analog I/O (2x In-16 bit, 4-20mA / 2x Out-16 bit) BM4-F-AIO-04
R Square wave encoder emulation see BM4-F-IEE-01
S Square wave encoder emulation see BM4-F-IEE-02
T SSI encoder emulation see BM4-F-SIE-01
U Digital I/O without PE connection (4x IN,4x OUT) BM4-F-DIO-11
V Fast digital I/O without PE connection  
(4 x IN, 4 x OUT) see BM4-F-FIO-11

BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX ES controller function module, position H
00 No option module
10 Sercos slave, standard see BM4-O-SER-XX
20 Profibus slave, standard see BM4-O-PRO-XX
30 CANopen slave, standard BM4-O-CAN-XX
50 PLC, standard, MC, without flash see BM4-O-PLC-XX

51 PLC, standard, MC, 4 MB flash
52 PLC, local, without MC, only for slave option
modules, without NOVRAM, Runtime license,
standard
53 PLC, Local, without MC, only for slave option
modules, 56 kB NOVRAM, Runtime license, 
standard
54 PLC, standard, option licensing right TechLib
55 PLC, standard, option coated, without licensing
right
60 EtherCAT for controller, SoE, special 16 bit RFG BM4-O-ETH-XX

61 EtherCAT for controller, CoE, standard
62 EtherCAT for controller, SoE, standard
80 VARAN slave see BM4-O-VAR-XX
90 POWERLINK controlled node see BM4-O-PLK-XX
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Safety functionality option

S01 Safety function STO
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXXXXXX] - [XXX] - XX Software release controller (firmware)

01 Serial version 1.x
03 Serial version 3.x
NOTE!
A device with safety relay, whose part number does not start with „06“, does not ap-
ply as a safety device as defined by the PL classification according to ISO 13849 or
SIL according to EN 61800. This device is not certificated for safety functions
Devices with the approval mark of TÜV Rheinland and the Safety label provide a cer-
tified safety function, only, refer to ZPage 29–.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4.5 Type code
4.5.2 Explanation version code
The version code is added on the type code.
NOTE!
Only version codes necessary for the user are explained.
XXXX - X - XXX- XXX Design version power unit

3004 BM443X generation 1
from 3006 BM443X generation 2
XXXX - X - XXX- XXX Design version controller

4.6 UL notes
The notes below must be observed at a cc - conformity drive.

In case you consider UL 508 C observe the notes below also:
m >Parameter manual b maXX 4400, 4600, 4700<
n Adjustment for motor overload monitoring (I2t)
m ZRequirements to the connecting cables– on page 168
n Use 60 °C/75 °C copper wire only for all devices
n Use Class 1 wire only.
m ZElectrical connection power unit– on page 191
n Note tightening torque for connection terminals.
m Only for water-cooled devices:
n In order to avoid internal condensation: The temperature of cooling water supply
must be higher or at least equal to the internal temperature of the device.
n Maximum cooling water temperature 60°C
n Maximum water pressure 3 bar / 300 kPa in the cooling circuit.
m ZRequired environmental conditions– on page 55
n Use the device only in a pollution degree 2 environment
n Observe the maximum environmental temperature and the derating
m ZRequirements to the energy supply / supply system– on page 52
n Observe the short circuit current capability.
The device is rated for a maximum Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of 65 kA,
480 V AC.
n 24 V supply must not reach more than 30 V DC. Additional fuse protection with max.
4 A fuse.
m ZFuses– from page 273
n Converters may be used with listed fuses or listed circuit breakers DIVQ as overcur-
rent protection.
m ZRequirements for the motor temperature sensors– from page 170
n Observe the connecting data of the motor temperature sensor.
cUL notes Additional only for Canada:
NOTE
Overvoltage Protection Device have to be installed in front of the input circuit of the
device to limit the maximum overvoltage peak to 2.5 kV.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4.7 Display and operation elements
4.7.1 LEDs
m Standard controller 4 LEDs without 7-segment display

BM4XXX - XXX - XX0XX and BM4XXX - XXX - XX1XX:
On the front side of the device there are 4 LEDs. The 4 LEDs (H1 to H4) show infor-
mation about the operating status and are also displayed in the operating software.
m Standard controller 6 LEDs with 7-segment display

On the front side of the device there are 6 LEDs. Both upper LEDs (UH1 and UH2) are
reserved. The four lower LEDs (H1 to H4) show information about the operating status
and are also displayed in the operating software.
ZStandard controller– on page 196 shows the position of the display elements.
m ES controller
BM4XXX - XXX - XX4XX and BM4XXX - XXX - XX5XX:
On the front side of the device there are 6 LEDs. Both upper LEDs (UH1 and UH2) are
reserved. The four lower LEDs (H1 to H4) show information about the operating status
and are also displayed in the operating software.
ZES controller– on page 197 shows the position of the display elements.
LED  Both LEDs UH1 and UH2 are not led through to the design cover.
(UH1, UH2) Not available with BM4XXX - XXX - XX0XX and BM4XXX - XXX - XX1XX.
Standard controller 6 LEDs ES controller

Operating status Both of the upper LEDs (H1 and H2) indicate the drive status.
H1
Design cover Without design cover ES controller

standard controller 4 LEDs standard controller 6 LEDs
green: the motor rotates, torque direction 1.

orange: the motor rotates, torque direction 2.
NOTE!
LED H1 shows only the torque direction, it cannot be used to show the direction of
rotation.
H2
green: Pulse enable. 

The motor is supplied by the power unit
orange: Power ON, the device is ready-to-operate. 

In case the LED lights up orange colored during opera-
tion, maybe the pulse enable is missing or the quickstop
was activated.
flashing green/orange: Pulses enabled for generating the magnetic field of asyn-
chronous machines. No torque enable yet.
green with short orange flashing memory access EEPROM, if possible do not switch off
or the device in this phase.
orange with short green flashing:

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Current limit
H3
red: set current limit of the controlled has been reached.

m adapt your threshold or set „no reaction“
Error LED doesn’t light up: the internal monitoring have not found an error.
H4
red, continuously: Error.

m Identify and then remove the error with help of the
operating program ProDrive or the 7-segment display.
For further information see ZTroubleshooting and fault
correction– from page 229.
red, flashing: Warning
m Identify the warning with help of the operating program
ProDrive. 
Warning messages do not affect the operation of the
device.
For further information see ZTroubleshooting and fault
correction– from page 229

4.7.2 7-segment display
The 7-segment-display in normal operation shows the operation status. 

In case of error the error code is shown.
(not BM4XXX - XXX - XX0XX and BM4XXX - XXX - XX1XX)
Display Status Meaning

0 Not ready to start Initialization phase, pulses inhibited
1 Inhibit start Pulses inhibited, initialization completed error-free
2 Ready-to-start Pulses inhibited
3 Switched on Pulses for field generation at asynchronous machines enabled,
no torque generation yet.
4 Operation enabled Pulses enabled, drive function enabled
5 Inhibit operation active Pulses enabled, braking procedure active
6 Shutdown active Pulses enabled, braking procedure active
7 Quick stop active Pulses enabled, braking procedure active
E Error reaction active Pulses enabled, braking procedure active
F Fault Pulses inhibited, error status
The display shows the error code.
The single drive statuses are specified in chapter device management in parameter man-
ual 5.03039.
The display shows the error code in error status. Only errors are displayed, which enable
an error reaction or have enabled one. Errors without reaction and warnings are not dis-
played (see ZFault detection– from page 234).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
4.7.3 Address switch S1 - S4 (only ES controller)
EtherCAT® Type code ES controller with EtherCAT®:
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - 1X (with EtherCAT® interface)
IP address  The IP address of the controller consists of 32 bits or 4 bytes (e.g. 192.168.125.203). Both
S1 to S4 of the first bytes are set with the base address (192.168.) at the factory. 
Both of the last bytes are set by means of the address switches S1, S2, S3 and S4. In the
process, S1 and S2 as well as S3 and S4 each represent an 8 bit value.
The IP address 192.168.0.0 is not permitted or, respectively, is reserved.
For information on changing the base address, see the parameter manual.
Example
Switch


Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Figure 56: EtherCAT® Address switch setting

CANopen® Type code ES controller with CANopen®:
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - 2X (with CANopen interface)
Baud rate S2
20 kBit/s 125 kBit/s
250 kBit/s 500 kBit/s
1 MBit/s

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Address S3/S4
Figure 57: CANopen® address switch

5TRANSPORT AND PACKAGING
5.1 Safety notes for transport
NOTICE!
Damage due to unauthorized transport!
Transport handled by untrained personnel can lead to a substantial amount of mate-
rial damage.
Therefore:
m The unloading of the packages upon delivery as well as the in-house transport
should only be done by trained personnel.
m Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH sales office if necessary.
WARNING!
Danger of mechanical hazard!
Secure devices against falling down.
Therefore:
m Take suitable measures, such as supports, hoists, straps, etc., to ensure that de-
vices cannot fall down.
m Use appropriate handling material.
5.2 What to observe when transporting
For initial transport of the device, it is packed at the manufacturer. If the device is to be
further transported, ensure that the following conditions are met throughout the entire
transport:
m Climate class 2 K 3 as per EN 60721-3-2
m Temperature range - 25 °C up to + 70 °C
m Vibration, shock, continuous shock class 2 M 1 as in EN 60721-3-2

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
5.3 Transport inspection
5.3 Transport inspection
Upon receiving the delivered goods, immediately examine them for completeness and
transport damage.
If there is outwardly visible transport damage, proceed as follows:
m Do not accept the delivery or conditionally accept it with reservations.
m Note the extent of the damage on the transport documents or on the delivery note of
the transport agent.
m Immediately file a complaint with the freight carrier. Have the complaint confirmed in
writing and immediately contact the responsible representative of Baumüller Nürnberg
GmbH.
NOTE!
The device may not be operated if there is visible transport damage!
5.4 Unpacking
After having received the still packaged device:

h Avoid transport shocks and hard jolts, e.g. when putting an item down.
If no transport damage is visible:

h Open the packaging of the device.
h Verify the delivery scope based on the delivery note.
File a claim with the responsible Baumüller representative if the delivery is incomplete.
NOTE!
Claim each individual deficiency as soon as it has been detected. Damage claims can
only be validly asserted within the claim registration period.
5.5 Disposal of the packaging
The packaging consists of cardboard, plastic, metal parts, corrugated cardboard and/or
wood.
h When disposing of the packaging, comply with the national regulations.

6 MOUNTING
The device is designed for mounting in a control cabinet.
Mounting consists of the following steps:
1 Prepare mounting
(for drill holes/cut-out segments, see ZDrilling patterns– from page 147)
2 Install
(fixing see ZMounting instructions– on page 155)
6.1 Safety notes
NOTE!
Mounting shall only be performed by employees of the manufacturer or by other qual-
ified personnel.
Qualified personnel are persons who – on account of their occupational training, ex-
perience, instruction and knowledge of relevant standards and stipulations, accident
prevention regulations and operating conditions – are authorized by the persons re-
sponsible for the safety of the facilities to perform the respective activities that are
necessary, while at the same time recognizing and preventing any potential risks.
The qualifications necessary for working with the device are, for example:
m Occupational training or instruction in accordance with the standards of safety en-
gineering for the care and use of appropriate safety equipment.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
6.1 Safety notes
WARNING!
Danger as a result of faulty mounting!
The mounting requires qualified personnel with adequate experience. Faulty mount-
ing can lead to life-threatening situations or substantial material damage.
Therefore:
m Only allow mounting to be performed by employees of the manufacturer or by oth-
er qualified personnel.
WARNING!
Danger of mechanical impact!
Secure devices against falling down.
Therefore:
m Take suitable measures, such as supports, hoists and assisting personnel, to en-
sure that device cannot fall down.
m Use appropriate means of transport.
NOTICE!
Danger due to electrostatic discharge.
The connecting terminals of the device are partially at risk due from ESD.
Therefore:
Please heed the respective notes.

Mounting 6
CAUTION!
Danger due to sharp edges.
If the device is lifted with unprotected hands during mounting, palms or fingers can
be cut. If the device falls, feet could be injured.
Figure 58: Danger area near the mechanical mounting
Therefore:
m Ensure that only qualified personnel, who are familiar with the safety notes and as-
sembly instructions, mount this device.
Wear safety gloves.
Wear safety shoes.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
6.2 Preparing for mounting
Based on the planning documents and the drilling pattern (see ZDrilling patterns– from
page 147), the cutout sections and the positions of the attachment drill holes can be de-
termined.
NOTICE!
Property damage due to conductive contamination.
Therefore:
m When performing installation work of any kind, it must be ensured that no foreign
material (e.g. drill shavings, copper strands, etc.) gets into the device as a result.
m If possible, the drilling of the holes should be done before mounting the device and
the configuring of the cables should take place outside of the control cabinet. If this
is not possible, the device must be appropriately covered.
Remove this covering again prior to start!
CAUTION!
Eye injury due to flung particles.
Metal particles are flung when making the drill holes and the cutout sections.
Therefore:
Wear protective eye wear!
h Preparing drill holes and cutout sections.

Mounting 6
6.2.1 Drilling patterns
Use the drilling pattern to make the necessary drill holes/cutout sections.
NOTE!
Consider the minimum clearances for cooling when making the drill holes.
All dimensions in millimeters [mm].
Further notes see ZDimensions– from page 31 and ZCooling– from page 61.
How to determine the required space in the control cabinet, see ZDimensions– from
page 31.
Tolerance 
specifications
Drill hole dimensioning ±0.2 mm
Dimensioning openings +1.0 mm
Relative tolerance of discretionary divisions ±0.1 mm
6.2.1.1 Drilling patterns BM441X
Figure 59: Drilling pattern BM441X

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
6.2.1.2 Drilling patterns BM442X
Figure 60: Drilling pattern BM442X
6.2.1.3 Drilling patterns BM4X3X
Figure 61: Drilling pattern BM443X, BM463X

Mounting 6

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Hole
Figure 64: Drilling pattern BM465X-FXX-3XXXX, BM475X-FXX-3XXXX

Mounting 6

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Figure 66: Drilling pattern BM466X-FXX-3XXXX, BM4766-FXX-3XXXX

Mounting 6
Figure 67: Drilling pattern BM447X-F, BM477X-F

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Figure 68: Drilling pattern BM447X-A

Mounting 6
6.3 Mounting instructions
There are different kinds of mounting.

Each mounting method is shown in a graphic (see ZFigure 69– on page 156 to ZFigure
72– on page 159)
The screws and washers required for mounting are listed beneath the respective graphic.
Carry out mounting as follows:

1 Provide suitable transport/lifting equipment as needed.
2 Keep suitable fastening components readily available.
3 For cold plate devices:
n check the surface quality of device’s rear panel/mounting plate, refer to ZRequire-
ments mounting plate for cold plate– on page 162
4 Mount the device.
5 Subsequently connect the water-cooling unit

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Figure 69: Mounting instruction BM441X, BM442X-S, BM4X3X-S/Z, BM444X-S/Z, BM464X-S/Z
Device BM441X-XXX BM441X-XXX BM442X-S BM443X-S/Z BM444X-S/Z

-XO -X2 BM463X-Z BM464X-Z
-X1
A - Screws 2 x M5 4 x M5 4 x M5 4 x M5 4 x M5
B - Washers 2 x (5.3 x 10) 4 x (5.3 x 10) 4 x (5.3 x 10) 4 x (5.3 x 10) 4 x (5.3x15)
c - Mounting space c = 5 mm c = 5 mm c = 5 mm c = 5 mm c = 5 mm

Mounting 6
Figure 70: Mounting instruction BM445X-S/Z, BM465X-S/Z, BM446X-S/Z, BM466X-S/Z
Device BM445X-S/Z BM446X-S/Z

BM465X-Z BM466X-Z
A - Screws 4x M8 4x M8
B - Washers 4x (8.4x21) 4x (8.4x21)
C - Mounting space c=7 mm c=7 mm

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Figure 71: Mounting instruction BM447X-A/F, BM477X-FXX-3XXXX
Device BM447X-A BM447X-F, 

BM477X-FXX-3XXXX
A - Screws 38 x M6 22 x M6
B - Spring washers 38 x DIN6796-6-FST 22 x DIN6796-6-FST
C - Washers 38 x (6.4 x 12.5) 22 x (6.4 x 12.5)

Mounting 6
Figure 72: Mounting instruction „diverse“
Device BM442X-A/F/Z/C BM443X-A/F/C BM444X-A/F BM445X-A/F BM446X-A/F

BM463X-F BM464X-F BM465X-F BM466X-F
A - Screws 4 x M5 14 x M4 16 x M5 16 x M8 20 x M8
B - Washers 4 x (5.3 x 10) 14 x (4.3 x 9) 16 x (5.3 x 15) 16 x (8.4x21) 20 x (8.4x21)
Device BM465X-FXX-3XXXX BM466X-FXX-3XXXX

BM475X-FXX-3XXXX BM476X-FXX-3XXXX
A - Screws 18x M6 18 x M8
B - Washers 18 x (6.4x17) 18 x (8.4x21)

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
WARNING!
Danger because of conductive fluid in connection with electricity!
1 The mounting drills are outside of the gasket. With non-waterproof fastening holes,
e. g. the liquid coolant can ingress into the control cabinet.
m Seal the mountings against water. Use, e.g., waterproof draw-in bolts and sealants
between screws and bolts.
Type of protection: control cabinet with built in through-hole devices BM442X-A/F
NOTE
The following required control cabinet mounting is only valid for control cabinets with
protection class IP54 or higher.
 IP protection class for air-cooled through-hole devices: IP44

 IP protection class for water-cooled through-hole devices: IP54

Mounting 6
Figure 73: Control cabinet mounting BM442X-A/F

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
6.3.1 Requirements mounting plate for cold plate
The cooling version cold plate is a particular efficient cooling alternative. The heat dissi-
pation is done via 2 contact surfaces. The first one is the mounting platform within the con-
trol cabinet or on the machine base, the other is the cold plate on the device’s back. High
requirements e.g. to surface roughness and evenness for this surface are specified, to
ensure an optimal heat flow. Already a slight damage/pollution of the surface can cause
a significant deterioration in heat dissipation to the mounting plate.
For this reason while handle the units protect the sensitive function surface to avoid dam-
age.
Surface flatness 0.05 mm

(across the entire surface)
Surface roughness Ra 1.2 µm
Material of the plate (recommendation) AlMgSi 0.5
NOTICE!
Property damage due to overheating
Scratches and burrs can inhibit the heat dissipation of cold plate devices.
Therefore
m When mounting cold plate devices, ensure that the surface quality of the mounting
plate meets the specifications and ensure that the device’s rear panel/mounting
plate does not have any scratches or burrs.
6.3.2 Connecting the water cooler
With water cooled devices (BM44XX-F, BM46XX-F, BM47XX-F and BM44XX-Z,

BM46XX-Z, BM47XX-Z) you connect the coolant circulation before electric installation.
The water cooler has on its bottom side two pressfitting-transition pieces 
15 mm x R 1/2‘‘ AG for flat seals.
h Connect the cooling circulation to the water coolerr
Tube material Outer tube- Screwing

1.4571 15 mm 1/2’ AG for flat washer
X6CrNiMoTi17-12-2
In case you refer to UL 508 C: There must be a pressure-relief valve with a threshold pres-
sure of maximum 6 bar in the cooling circulation.

7 INSTALLATION
This chapter describes the electrical installation of the device. The mechanical mounting
is described in ZMounting– from page 143.
Initial commissioning is described in the Parameter manual b maXX 4000 in chapter
Commissioning.
Prior to installation, ensure that the technical prerequisites have been fulfilled:
1 Check the demands on the electrical power supply.
2 Check the requirements for the electrical cables and the provision of corresponding
cables.
3 Check the properties of the connections and the specified configuration of the respec-
tive cables.
7.1 Safety notes
NOTE!
Installation shall only be performed by employees of the manufacturer or by other
qualified personnel.
Qualified personnel are persons who – on account of their occupational training, ex-
perience, instruction and knowledge of relevant standards and stipulations, accident
prevention regulations and operating conditions – are authorized by the persons re-
sponsible for the safety of the facilities to perform the respective activities that are
necessary, while at the same time recognizing and preventing any potential risks.
The qualifications necessary for working with the device are, for example:
m Occupational training or instruction, and the authorization to commission, ground
and mark electrical power circuits and devices in accordance with the standards of
the safety engineering.
m Occupational training or instruction, in accordance with the standards of work safe-
ty, for the care and use of appropriate safety equipment.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.1 Safety notes
WARNING!
Danger because of faulty installation and initial commissioning!
Installation and commissioning require qualified personnel with adequate experi-
ence. A installation fault can cause danger situations or large damage of property.
Therefore:
m Only personnel from manufacturer or qualified personnel operate while installation
and initial commissioning
DANGER!
Inevitably, when operating this electrical device, certain parts of it are energized with
hazardous voltage.
Therefore:
m Pay heed to areas on the device that could be dangerous during the electrical in-
stallation.
m Pay heed to areas on the device that could still be electrically energized after op-
eration.

Installation 7
Danger from 
residual energy
DANGER!
Discharge time of the system = discharge time of the device with the longest DC link
discharge time in the DC link connection.
Refer to ZElectrical data basic units– from page 63.
Therefore:
take a much longer time. In this case, the necessary waiting period must be deter-
mined or a measurement made as to whether the equipment is de-energized. This
discharge time must be posted, together with an IEC 60417-5036 (2002-10) warn-
ing symbol, on a clearly visible location of the control cabinet.
7.2 Voltage test
DANGER!
During the routine test of these devices, a voltage test is performed by Baumüller
Nürnberg GmbH in accordance with EN 61800-5-1, Section 5.2.3.2. It is thus unnec-
essary for the customer to do this.
Therefore:
m Subsequent tests of the devices using high voltages may only be performed by
Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
m Disconnect the converter from the system during high-voltage testing!

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.3 Demands on the power supply
7.3 Demands on the power supply
For all important data, see ZRequirements to the energy supply / supply system– from
page 52.
Minor deviations from requirements in the power supply can lead to malfunctioning of the
device. If the power supply deviates too much from the requirements, the device can be
destroyed.
The devices may only be operated in industrial networks.
The destruction of the device can cause personal injury.
DANGER!
If the requirements for the power supply are not complied, the device can be dam-
aged or destroyed, thereby greatly endangering individuals.
Therefore:
m Prior to installation, ensure that the demands for power supply have been fulfilled.

Installation 7
7.3.1 Connection instructions at special power supply systems
Note: Not valid for b maXX power modules.
n Single phase connection (BM441X)
Figure 74: Single phase connection BM441X
n Connection to single phase grounded power supply systems

(BM442X for IT systems, BM443X ... BM447X)
right wrong
Figure 75: Single phase connection (BM442X ... BM447X, basic units)

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.4 Requirements to the connecting cables
n Connection to single phase grounded power supply systems with isolated trans-
former for the following cases
1) BM441X, BM442X except for IT power supply systems
2) BM443X ... BM447X, BM46XX, BM47XX at operating altitude > 2000 m
Figure 76: Connection to single phase grounded power supply systems with an isolated transformer
7.4 Requirements to the connecting cables
h Take into account IEC/EN 60204-1, Chapter 13 when selecting the cable.
h The protective ground cross-section of the cable must be compliant with IEC/
EN 60204-1, Section 5.2, Tab. 1.
h A fixed connection for the protective ground conductor is mandatorily specified for op-
eration of the device.
h Use copper cable approved for a minimum of 60 °C (drives < 3 x 100 A) or 75 °C
(drives  3 x 100 A), if comply with UL 508C.
For further details (e.g. maximum permitted length), see ZCabling– from page 268.
7.5 Protection of the device and the cable
Fuses must be installed to protect this device and the cables against overload and pos-
sible damage/destruction through the electrical power supply. For data on the required
fuses, see ZFuses– from page 273.

Installation 7
7.6 PE connection and RCD compatibility
Depending on the functional principle, leakage current >3.5 mAAC or >10 mADC can flow
through the protective ground conductor. Consequently, a stationary ground conductor
connection in accordance with EN 61800-5-1 is required.
DANGER!
This product can cause direct and/or alternating current in the protective ground con-
ductor.
The leakage current, due to the functional principle of the device, can lead to prema-
ture triggering of the fault current protective device or generally prevent triggering of
it.
Therefore:
m Wherever a differential current device (RCD) is used for protection in case of direct
or indirect contact, only an RCD of the type B is permitted on the power supply side
of the device.
m Otherwise a different protective measure must be utilized, such as separation from
the surroundings by means of double or enhanced isolation, or separation from the
power supply system by means of an isolating transformer, for example.
7.7 Installation requirements with regard to EMC
NOTE!
The emission of radio frequency interference (RFI) is to a great extent dependent on
the wiring, spatial expansiveness and the arrangement of the components in the sys-
tem. Ensuring electromagnetic compatibility compliance in accordance with legal re-
quirements is therefore only possible on the completely assembled system and is
thus the responsibility of the system manufacturer or proprietor (re Art. 6, Par. 9 of
the EMVG; European EMC law).
NOTE!
The important information on EMC-compliant installation can be found in these in-
struction handbook. Additional notes on building a CE-compliant system, that are im-
perative to take heed of, can be found in the Baumüller manual „Mains filter BFN“,
5.09010. This manual can be obtained from Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.8 Requirements for the motor temperature sensors
In order to have EMC-compliant and problem-free use within the framework of the legis-
lation, the following aspects must be taken into account. 
In case of any questions, please contact Sales or the Applications department of
Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
m Only use Baumüller motor cables and Baumüller components.
m Use suitable mains filters recommended by Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
m Mount all components on a single mounting plate with a continuously good electrically-
conductive surface (e.g. galvanized steel plate).
m Keep the ground connection device/ground plate as short as possible (< 30 cm) , using
fine-stranded cables with a large cross-section (>10 mm2).
m When installing, be sure to follow the correct sequence:
power supply system - fuse - filter - choke - (ferrite core) - BM4400, BM4600, BM4700
- (motor filter) - motor.
m Ensure that the motor cable is continuous, without interruption.
Do not interrupt motor cables with terminals, contactors or fuses, for example.
m Route the cables directly on the surface of the grounded mounting plate.
(smallest possible effective aerial height).
m When routing in parallel, a minimum clearance of 20 cm should be observed between
signal and control cables vis-à-vis the power cables.
m Cross cables with different EMC categories (signal cables - supply cables or motor ca-
bles) only in a 90° angle.
m Contact the major cable shield when laying cables through walls, which separate dif-
ferent EMC areas.
m Contact all the cable’s shields on both sides surface-to-surface and also well-conduc-
tive with ground.
7.8 Requirements for the motor temperature sensors
To protect the motor against not permitted overheating, a motor temperature sensor can
be connected to the b maXX device. The device switches off of the motor when a settable
threshold temperature has been exceeded.
Type Additional requirements: Isolation

KTY84/PT1000 - SELV/PELV
MSKL 1) (PTC) R = 1 k at Tthreshold, Imax < 2 mA SELV/PELV
1)
Motor protection resistor (PTC) as per DIN 44080-082
NOTE!
The motor temperature sensor should be installed in such a manner that „safe elec-
trical separation“ is ensured. The motor temperature sensors integrated into
Baumüller motors meet these requirements. If third-party motors are connected, the
proprietor must ensure that the temperature sensors used in the motor of a third-party
manufacturer motor comply with the „safe electrical separation“ function.

Installation 7
7.9 Installation procedure
DANGER!
Electrically live parts are life-threatening.
Therefore:
m Make certain that the parts to be mounted (e.g. power supply cables) and the
mounting areas are de-energized for the entire duration of mounting the device.
HINWEIS!
Steps which are not necessary for the installation of b maXX power modules are
marked.
h Lay all cables EMC-compatible.

h Connect cables (see ZWiring diagrams– from page 173).
(Observe the torques!)
The following steps must be carried out at installation:

1 Connect the motor through terminals 1U2, 1V2, 1W2 and PE.
Ensure the proper phases when connecting (rotational direction).
Observe the permitted torques!
2 Connect fuses (S1) - not necessary for power modules
(in case you consider UL 508 C: use the UL-listed semiconductor- or total-range-
fuses in chapter ZFuses– from page 273).
3 Connect mains filter (L2) - not necessary for power modules.
4 Connect the power choke (L1) at the mains filter output 
(not necessary for BM441X, BM442X (except BM4426) and for power modules).
5 Connect the device via the power supply terminals 1U1, 1V1 and 1W1 to the power
choke output - not necessary for power modules.
6 Connect the protective conductor to the terminal PE (a fixed ground conductor con-
nection is mandatorily specified).
7 Connect 24 V power supply:
Terminals X100-1/2, X100-5/6
(if UL 508C is being considered, then limit the current to 4 A).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.9 Installation procedure
8 Connect encoder(s) (for further information, refer to handbook encoder modules,

5.01042).
NOTE!
Plugging in and pulling out encoder cables while they are energized is prohibited, and
could lead to their destruction.
Therefore, always first switch off the 24 V supply voltage and lock the encoder con-
nectors when operating.
9 Connect the temperature sensor of the motor. (Observe the proper polarity!)
10 Connect the signal generator for the pulse enable:
terminals X3-5, X3-3
11 Connect the signal generator for the quick stop:
terminals X3-4, X3-3
12 Perhaps connect (dependent on the application - not necessary for power modules
- a brake resistor (RB) via terminals Ba+, Ba-.
13 Connect the brake of the motor (option):
Terminals X101-1/2 and X101-3/4
14 Connect the safety relay (if existing) via X102-3 and X102-4 as well as X103-3 and
X103-4 (connection data safety relay also see ZC.5 Technical data safety relay mod-
ule– on page 350).

Installation 7
7.10 Wiring diagrams
7.10.1 Connection diagrams
7.10.1.1 BM44XX, BM46XX, BM47XX (basic units)
Ballast bus
Mains bus
+ 24 V **
* PE U V W
M 24 V
M 24 V
M 24 V
230 V
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
S1
S2 L2
L1
PC
1U1
1V1
1W1
X100-5
X100-2
X100-3
PE
X100-4
X100-1
X100-6
X36-N
X36-L
X102-1
X102-2
X102-3
X102-4
X103-1
X103-2
X103-3
X103-4
SUB-D, 1:1
9 ProDrive
X1
X3-1
X3-2
X3-3 M 24 V
X3-4 + 24 V
X3-5 + 24 V
X3-6
X101-1 + 24 V **
X101-2
X101-3
X101-4 M 24 V
X101-5
X101-6
A
BM4-ENC-XX
X1
1W2
1U2
1V2
1D1
1C1
Ba+
Ba-
PE
4000_0059_rev12_int.cdr
S3 15
M ENC
RB 3
Motor temperature
bra
Figure 77: Connection diagram with a directly controlled motor brake - basic units

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
HINWEIS!
If the motor brake is connected directly via X101-2 and X101-3 (see ZFigure 77– on
page 173), the shown direct installation is allowed only. It is not allowed within a multi-
axis installation e.g. to connect the plus and ground connections of all motor brakes
with each other.
An additional relay is necessary, if the voltage of the brake is 24V, or if the current of the
brake is greater than the switching capacitance of X101 (see ZX101 (SELV/PELV)– on
page 194) or if you consider UL508C and the current of the brake is greater 4 A.
Perhaps consider a limited operating voltage range of the brake because of the internal
voltage drop up to max. 2.6 V.

Installation 7
Ballast bus
Mains bus
+ 24 V**
* PE U V W
M 24 V
M 24 V
M 24 V
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
230 V
S1
S2 L2
L1
PC
1U1
1V1
1W1
X100-5
X100-2
X100-3
PE
X100-4
X100-1
X100-6
X36-N
X36-L
X102-1
X102-2
X102-3
X102-4
X103-1
X103-2
X103-3
X103-4
SUB-D, 1:1
9 ProDrive
X1
X3-1
X3-2
X3-3 M 24 V
X3-4 + 24 V
X3-5 + 24 V
X3-6
X101-1 + 24 V **
X101-2
X101-3
X101-4 M 24 V
X101-5
X101-6
A
BM4-ENC-XX
X1
1W2
1U2
1V2
1D1
1C1
Ba+
Ba-
PE
4000_0568_rev03_int.cdr
S3 15
M ENC
RB 3
Motor temperature
bra
Brake
voltage
Figure 78: Connection diagram with motor brake controlled via an add. relay - basic units

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.10.1.2 BM44XX, BM46XX, BM47XX power module
Ballast bus
Mains bus
+ 24 V **
* PE
M 24 V
M 24 V
M 24 V
230 V
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
S2
PC
X100-5
X100-2
X100-3
PE
X100-4
X100-1
X100-6
X36-N
X36-L
X102-1
X102-2
X102-3
X102-4
X103-1
X103-2
X103-3
X103-4
SUB-D, 1:1
9 ProDrive
X1
X3-1
X3-2
X3-3 M 24 V
X3-4 + 24 V
X3-5 + 24 V
X3-6
X101-1 + 24 V **
X101-2
X101-3
X101-4 M 24 V
X101-5
X101-6
A
BM4-ENC-XX
X1
1W2
1U2
1V2
1D1
1C1
Ba+
Ba-
PE
4000_0612_rev02_int.cdr
S3 15
M ENC
RB 3
Motor temperature
bra
S4
U DC link
Connection to other
BM41XX or BM44XX units
Figure 79: Connection diagram with a directly controlled motor brake - power modules

Installation 7
NOTE
If the motor brake is connected directly via X101-2 and X101-3 (see ZFigure 77– on
page 173) the shown direct installation is allowed only. It is not allowed within a multi-
axis installation e.g. to connect the plus and ground connections of all motor brakes
with each other.
An additional relay is necessary, if the voltage of the brake is 24V, or if the current of the
brake is greater than the switching capacity of X101 (see ZX101 (SELV/PELV)– on page
194) or if you consider UL508C and the current of the brake is greater 4 A.
Perhaps consider a limited operating voltage range of the brake because of the internal
voltage drop up to max. 2.6 V.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Ballast bus
Mains bus
+ 24 V**
* PE
M 24 V
M 24 V
M 24 V
+ 24 V
+ 24 V
230 V
S2
PC
X100-5
X100-2
X100-3
PE
X100-4
X100-1
X100-6
X36-N
X36-L
X102-1
X102-2
X102-3
X102-4
X103-1
X103-2
X103-3
X103-4
SUB-D, 1:1
9 ProDrive
X1
X3-1
X3-2
X3-3 M 24 V
X3-4 + 24 V
X3-5 + 24 V
X3-6
X101-1 + 24 V **
X101-2
X101-3
X101-4 M 24 V
X101-5
X101-6
A
BM4-ENC-XX
X1
1W2
1U2
1V2
1D1
1C1
Ba+
Ba-
PE
4000_0613_rev01_int.cdr
S3 15
M ENC
RB 3
Motor temperature
bra
S4
UDC link Brake

voltage
Connection to other
BM41XX or BM44XX units
Figure 80: Connection diagram with motor brake controlled via an additional relay - power modules

Installation 7
* is only valid for BM444X, BM464X, BM445X, BM465X, BM446X, BM466X accordingly the
cooling versions S and A, for BM447X cooling version -A:
Figure 81: Connection fan
** The power supply at X100 or X101 must externally be protected. At selection of the fuse
you must consider the cross-section of the connecting cable and the maximum allowable
load capacity (for X100: see X100 on ZPage 193–, for X101: see X101 on ZPage 194–).
In case you consider UL 508 C, you must limit the power supply to 100 W or fuse it with a
UL-listed 4 A fuse.
Ba- ... 1D1 Connections for brake resistor and DC link, see ZFigure 82– on page 181 and the follow-
ing
RB Brake resistor
PE....1W1 Power supply connection, see ZFigure 82– on page 181 and the following
S1 Fuse (cable + device), see ZFuses– from page 273
S2 Fuse (fan) *)
S3 Fuses brake resistor circuit (required for BM447X, BM477X), 
see ZFuses BM447X– on page 292.
S4 DC link fuse
L1 Power choke (not necessary for BM441X and BM442X except BM4426)
L2 Mains filter
X1 Serial interface (RS 232), see ZFigure 91– on page 196.
X3 Connections for ready-for-use, quick stop, pulse enable, see ZFigure 91– on page 196.
X36 Connections for fans (only BM444X-S/-A, BM445X-S/-A, BM465X-S/-A, BM446X-S/-A,
BM466X-S/-A, BM447X-A)
X100 Connections for 24 V power supply, additional data see ZFigure 91– on page 196 (SELV/
PELV) and table ZX100 (SELV/PELV)– on page 193.
X101 Terminals for brake, motor temperature, see ZFigure 82– on page 181 and the following
(SELV/PELV) and table X101 from ZPage 181–.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
X102 Connections of the safety relay, see ZFigure 82– on page 181 and the following (SELV/
PELV) and table ZX102 (option) Safety relay– on page 194.
X103 Terminals of the optional, second safety relay (only BM443X - BM447X, BM46XX,
BM47XX), see ZFigure 85– on page 184 and the following (SELV/PELV) and table ZX103
(0ption) Safety relay– on page 194.
A - X1 Encoder module, see documentation 5.01042 (SELV/PELV)
ENC Encoder
BRA Brake
PE....1W2 Connections for motor, see ZFigure 82– on page 181 and the following.
7.10.2 Terminal overviews
ZFigure 82– on page 181 and the following show the connections for protective conduc-
tors, power supply, motor, brake resistor, DC-link, safety relays and motor temperature
sensor (X101). ZFigure 91– on page 196 shows the control voltage and the connections
of the controller unit.
NOTE!
When having a switched off safety relay it is not possible to use the brake at BM441X
and BM442X
NOTE!
The characterization 1C1 and 1D1 is from the standard DIN EN 60445. 
1C1 is the connection to the positive DC link cable/current bar and was labeled with
ZK+ by Baumüller in the past. 
1D1 is the connection to the negative DC link cable/current bar and was labeled with
ZK- by Baumüller in the past.
NOTE!
When replacing a BM443X generation 1 by a generation 2 device (differentiation see
ZExplanation version code– on page 130) the fuses must be adjusted as well, refer
to ZFuses BM4X3X– from page 280.
Under certain conditions a mix mode of BM443X generation 1 and 2 is possible, see
ZMix mode BM443X generation 1 and 2– on page 124.

Installation 7
7.10.2.1 Terminals BM4412, BM4413
Figure 82: Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM4412 and BM4413

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.10.2.2 Terminals BM4414
Figure 83: Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM4414

Installation 7
7.10.2.3 Terminals BM442X
*) Do not apply terminals when using a power module!

Figure 84: Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM442X

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.10.2.4 Terminals BM443X, BM463X
*) Do not apply terminals when using a power module!!

Figure 85: Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM443X, BM463X

Installation 7
*) Do not apply terminals when using a power module!!

**) only BM444X-S/-A, BM464X-S/-A
Figure 86: Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM444X, BM464X

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.10.2.6 Terminals BM445X, BM446X, BM465X, BM466X
*) Do not apply terminals when using a power module!!

**) only BM445X-S/-A, BM465X-S/-A and BM446X-S/-A, BM466X-S/-A
Figure 87: Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM445X, BM465X, BM446X, BM466X
NOTE!
The brake resistor is connected at BM445X and BM446X between Ba- and 1C1.
Also see ZFigure 77– on page 173.

Installation 7
Figure 88: Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM466X and BM476X

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.10.2.8 Terminals BM4755
Figure 89: Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM4755

Installation 7
7.10.2.9 Terminals BM447X, BM4773
*) only BM447X-A
Figure 90: Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM447X and BM4773

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
NOTE!
The brake resistor is connected at the devices BM447X, BM477X between Ba- and
1C1. Also see ZFigure 77– on page 173.
DANGER!
Therefore:
After attaching all power cables to the device BM447X and BM477X, screw on the
cover careful to all screwing points by using the enclosed screws (6xM4x12) and
washers. The cover only must be able to be removed from the device with use of
tools.
The use of semiconductor fuses is obligatory at the power supply connection of
BM447X, BM477X devices. Semiconductor fuses are required in the brake resistor
circuit except the user assures the short-circuit protection of resistor and cable.

Installation 7
7.10.3 Electrical connection power unit
Power system Max. cross-section Connection Torque Load capacity

1U1, 1V1, 1W1, PE of connection technology
BM441X 2.5 mm2 Plug-in contact - see
ZFuses–
BM442X 4.0 mm2 Screw terminal min. 0.5 Nm
from page 273
max. 0.6 Nm
BM443X 10 mm2 Screw terminal min. 1.2 Nm
Generation 1 4) max. 1.5 Nm
BM443X 25 mm2 Screw terminal min. 2 Nm
power modules
not valid for
BM463X
BM464X max. 8 Nm
BM445X 2 x 95 mm2 1)3) Cable lug min. 10 Nm
BM465X for M8 max. 13 Nm
BM475X
BM476X
BM447X 2 x 185 mm2 2) Cable lug min. 12 Nm
BM477X 4 x 95 mm2 1) for M10 max. 25 Nm
1) The cable lug may be 25 mm wide at most. The maximum cable diameter is dependent on the cable lug. In
case the cable lug, which you use, can safely clamp a stronger cable than 95 mm2, you may also use stronger
cables than 95 mm2. Also see ZCables power supply - device– from page 268.
2)
The cable lug may be 35 mm wide at most. The maximum cable diameter is dependent on the cable lug. In
case the cable lug, which you use, can safely clamp a stronger cable than 185 mm2, you may also use stron-
ger cables than 185 mm2. Also see ZCables power supply - device– from page 268.
3)
One cable of the mentioned cross section is sufficient for the operation.
4)
See also ZExplanation type code– on page 126.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
DC link Max. cross-sec- Connection Torque Load capacity

1C1 and 1D12) tion of connec- technology 1C1 and 1D12)
Ballast tion Ba+ and Ba-3)
Ba+ and Ba- 1)
BM441X 2.5 mm2 Plug-in contact - see ZElectrical
data of the uni-
versal units–
max. 0.6 Nm
from page 63
BM443X 10 mm2 Screw terminal min. 1.2 Nm
BM463X
BM464X max. 8 Nm
BM475X
BM476X
1)
Not short-circuit-proof, consider maximum load! See „Brake resistor external“ in chapter ZTechnical Data–
from page 31.
2)
Not short-circuit-proof, consider maximum load! See „connected load DC link“ in chapter ZTechnical Data–
from page 31.
3)
See „permitted brake resistor continuous power“ in chapter ZTechnical Data– from page 31.
4)
5)
6)
7)
See also ZExplanation type code– on page 126.

Installation 7
Motor Max. cross-section Connection Torque Load capacity
1U2, 1V2, 1W2, PE of connection technology
BM441X 2.5 mm2 Plug-in contact - Is limited by
the device,
also see
max. 0.6 Nm
ZTechnical
BM443X 16 mm2 Screw terminal min. 2 Nm Data– from
BM463X max. 2.3 Nm page 31
BM464X max. 8 Nm
BM475X
BM476X
BM477X 4 x 95 mm2 1) for M10 max. 25 Nm
1)
2)
3)
Fan Max. cross-section of Connection Load

X36 connection technology
BM444X-S/-A 4.0 mm2 Spring Clip max. 1.0 A1)
BM464X-S/-A
BM445X-S/-A
BM465X-S/-A
BM446X-S/-A
BM466X-S/-A
BM447X-A
1)
For fuse protection a fuse with the tripping characteristic „delayed“ must be used.
X100 (SELV/PELV) Max. cross-section Connection technol- Load capacity

of connection ogy
24 V power supply 1.5 mm2 Plug-in contact X100-1, X100-2, X100-5 and
X100-6: max. 8.0 A, 
if you consider UL508C: max.
4.0 A

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
X101 (SELV/PELV) Max. cross-section Connection Load capacity

of connection technology
Brake BM4412 1.5 mm2 Plug-in contact X101-1 bis X101-4:
BM4413 min. 0.1 A, max. 0.5 A
BM442X
BM4414 1.5 mm2 Plug-in contact X101-1 bis X101-4:
BM443X min. 0.1 A, max. 1.0 A
BM463X
BM444X 1.5 mm2 Plug-in contact X101-1 bis X101-4:
BM464X min. 0.1 A, max. 4.0 A
BM445X 1.5 mm2 Plug-in contact X101-1 bis X101-4:
BM446X min. 0.1 A, max. 8.0 A
BM447X if you consider UL508C:
BM465X max. 4.0 A
BM466X
BM47XX
X102 (option) Max. cross-section Connection Load capacity /

Safety relay of connection technology voltage level
(SELV/PELV) 1.5 mm2 Plug-in contact see 
ZC.5 Technical data safety
relay module– on page 350
Notes on the usage of an OSSD test pulse see ZC.4 Requirements on an OSSD test
pulse– on page 349.
X103 (0ption) Max. cross-section Connection Load capacity /

Safety relay of connection technology voltage level
(SELV/PELV) 1.5 mm2 Plug-in contact see 
ZC.5 Technical data safety
relay module– on page 350
7.10.4 Requirements for the screwing
NOTE!
Follow the mentioned torques in ZFigure 87– on page 186 and in ZFigure 90– on
page 189 to ensure an adequate conductivity.

Installation 7
7.11 Controller terminals
NOTE!
This Instruction Handbook describes the controller without function and option mod-
ules. A corresponding manual is available to each function/option module, refer to
ZList of other applicable documents– on page 13.
HINWEIS!
1) If you consider UL508C, limit the current to 4 A.
2)
Do not apply voltage to the terminals X100-3 or X100-4, if the device is not supplied
via X100-1/2 with voltage. 
The signals „mains on“ and „brake resistor“ are internal digital control signals of the
system b maXX 4000. They are used at applications with DC link connection.
3) )
The PSI-module may not be attached or withdrawn, if the b maXX 4000 24 V pow-
er supply is ON. Beforehand switch off the device.
Further notes for the usage of the PSI module are to be found in parameter manual.
4) not BM44XX - XXX - XX0XX and BM44XX - XXX - XX1XX

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Standard 
controller
X100-1: +24V (SELV/PELV)1)

X100-2: +24V (SELV/PELV)1)
X100-3: Power supply on (bus) (SELV/PELV)2)
X100-4: Brake resistor on (SELV/PELV)2)
X100-5: M24V (SELV/PELV)1)
UH1: reserved
UH2: reserved
H1: green: torque direction 1, yellow: torque direction 2
H2: green: enabling, yellow: Power ON
H3: red: current limit reached
H4: red: error
X4: reserved
X1, depends on controller type, see ZPage 198–
H5 7-segment display 4) 
also see ZDisplay and operation elements– from page 132
X2:
Connection for Baumüller memory module PSI 3) 4)
X3-1: Ready for use ON (normally open contact) (SELV/PELV)

X3-2: Ready for use ON (change over) (SELV/PELV)
X3-3: Reference for 4 and 5 (SELV/PELV)
X3-4: Quick stop (SELV/PELV)
X3-5: Pulse enable (SELV/PELV)
X3-6: Ready for use ON (normally closed contact) (SELV/PELV)
Figure 91: Connection X100 and terminals of a standard controller

Installation 7
ES controller
X100-1: +24V (SELV/PELV)1)

X100-2: +24V (SELV/PELV)1)
X100-3: Power supply on (bus) (SELV/PELV)2)
X100-4: Brake resistor on (SELV/PELV)2)
UH1: reserved
UH2: reserved
H1: green: torque direction 1, yellow: torque direction 2
H2: green: enabling, yellow: Power ON
H3: red: current limit reached
H4: red: error
H5 7-segment display 4) 
also see ZDisplay and operation elements– from page 132
S1/2 Address switch to set controller IP address

S3/4 Also see 
ZAddress switch S1 - S4 (only ES controller)– from page 136
X1, depends on controller type, see ZPage 198–
X2:
Connection for Baumüller memory module PSI 3) 4)
X3-1: Ready for use ON (normally open contact) (SELV/PELV)

X3-2: Ready for use ON (change over) (SELV/PELV)
X3-3: Reference for 4 and 5 (SELV/PELV)
X3-4: Quick stop (SELV/PELV)
X3-5: Pulse enable (SELV/PELV)
X3-6: Ready for use ON (normally closed contact) (SELV/PELV)
X4-1: Analog input 1 + (SELV/PELV)

X4-2: Analog input 2 + (SELV/PELV)
X4-3: Reference analog output 1 and 2 (SELV/PELV)
X4-4: Analog output 1 + (SELV/PELV)
X4-5: Analog output 2 + (SELV/PELV)
X4-6: Reference analog input 1 (SELV/PELV)
X4-7: Reference analog input 2 (SELV/PELV)
X5, X6 depends on controller type, see ZPage 200–

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
X1 depends on controller type
BM4XXX - XXX - XX0XX (with RS232-interface)

BM4XXX - XXX - XX1XX (with RS232-interface)
BM4XXX - XXX - XX2XX (with RS232-interface)
1: reserved
2: TxD RS232
3: RxD RS232
4: DTR, DSR
5: Ground RS232
6: DTR, DSR
7: RTS
8: CTS
9: reserved
Recommended Connection technology Remark

connection cable
LIYCY 6x2x0.14 mm2 D-sub, 9-pin available as cable set:
see ZCable RS232– on page
304.
WARNING!
Risk of injury because of mechanical hazard!
If a PC is not connected via an isolated transformer, the machine can do unexpected
actions.
Therefore:
Connect the PC via an isolated transformer or use a battery operated PC (e. g. lap-
top, notebook) without connecting a charger.
NOTE!
In case you don’t use an optically decoupled interface cable, the cable shield has only
to be connected to the connector housing at the controller connector.
The company Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH recommends the usage of optically decou-
pled transmitters (e.g. from the company Ratioplast part No. 901SV232C6095 and
part No. 901SV232T6095)
Refer to ZInterface cable RS232– on page 272, if the cable is made by the customer.

Installation 7
BM4XXX - XXX - XX3XX[Ryy] - XX (with Ethernet interface)
X1
H11 1: TX+
2: TX-
3: RX+
4: reserved
5: reserved
6: RX-
7: reserved
H12
8: reserved
Name Meaning
H11 off: no activity
yellow: half duplex
green: full duplex
H12 off: no connection
yellow: 10 Mbit
green: 100 Mbit
Ethernet cables are available as accessories (see ZAccessories Ethernet/EtherCAT®.–

on page 305).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
X3 Ready for use ON (SELV/PELV)

Quick stop (SELV/PELV)
Pulse enable (SELV/PELV)
Max. cross-section Connection Load capacity /

of connection technology voltage level
1.5 mm2 Plug-in contact Ready for use ON; X3-1, X3-2 
and X3-6: 
max. 0.2 A
Quick stop; X3-4
Pulse enable; X3-5:
0 (low) 0 V to 5 V
1 (high) 12 V to 28 V
X5/X6 depends on ES controller type
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - 1X (with EtherCAT® interface)
X5 IN
H51 1: TX+
2: TX-
3: RX+
4: reserved
5: reserved
6: RX-
7: reserved
H52
8: reserved
X6 OUT
H61 1: TX+
2: TX-
3: RX+
4: reserved
5: reserved
6: RX-
7: reserved
H62
8: reserved
NOTE!
Setting the IP address, see ZEtherCAT®– from page 136.

Installation 7
Name Meaning Flashing pattern

H51 (green) X5 Link / Act off: no connection
on: connection
flash: data transmission
H52 (yellow) ERROR on: ERROR 
(receiver error Phy1/Phy2)
H61 (green) X6 Link / Act off: no connection
on: connection
flash: data transmission
H62 (yellow) RUN off: ERROR/INIT
500 ms on/ 
500 ms off: PREOPERATIONAL
200 ms on/
1 s off: SAFEOPERATIONAL
on: OPERATIONAL
Ethernet cables are available (see ZAccessories Ethernet/EtherCAT®.– on page 305).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
BM4XXX - XXX - XXXXX[Ryy] - 2X (with CANopen®-interface)
X5 IN
H51 1: CAN high
2: CAN low
3: Ground (GND)
4: reserved
5: reserved
6: not connected
7: Ground (GND)
H52
8: not connected
X6 OUT
H61 1: CAN high
2: CAN low
3: Ground (GND)
4: reserved
5: reserved
6: reserved
7: Ground (GND)
H62
8: reserved
The LEDs have no function.
NOTE!
Setting the IP address, see ZCANopen®– from page 139.
CAN cables are available (see ZAccessories - CANopen®.– on page 306).

Installation 7
7.11.1 Encoder connection slot/position A and B
NOTE
For further information see Instruction Handbook Encoder modules 5.01042.
m BM4-F-ENC- 01, BM4-F-ENC-11, BM4-F-ENC-21; Resolver plug-in module

Some encoders are listed in ZEncoder modules slot/position A and B– on page 123, pre-
assembled encoder cables see ZEncoder cables– from page 307. 
All encoders, which comply to the following technical specifications, may also be used:
Number of pole pairs The ratio between the number of motor pole pairs and
of the number of pole pairs of the encoder must be
integer. 1)
Permitted current input max. 160 mA
Excitation frequency 4 kHz
Excitation current 160 mA
Transmission ratio BM4-F-ENC-01 0.5
BM4-F-ENC-11 0.28
NOTE
Resolvers are to be used only for motors with maximum ten pole pairs.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Pin assignment Pin no. Pin assignment

1 Resolver ref -
2 Resolver ref +
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Resolver COS +
6 Reserved
7 Resolver SIN +
8 Resolver SIN -
9 Resolver COS -
10 Reserved
11 Reserved
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
D-sub socket 15-pin 14 Temperature sensor +2)
15 Temperature sensor - 2)
* do not assign
1)
Example:

3
Number of pole pairs motor =3 --- = 3 permitted 
Number of pole pairs resolver =1 1

3
Number of pole pairs motor =3 --- = 1 5 not permitted 
Number of pole pairs resolver =2 2
2)
Requirements to the temperature sensor:
Type Additional requirements Insulation

KTY84 - SELV/PELV
NTC (MSKL) R = 1K at Tprotection, Imax < 2mA SELV/PELV

Installation 7
m BM4-F-ENC-02, BM4-F-ENC-12; Sine-cosine encoder module Hiperface®
The sine-cosine encoder module provides a Hiperface® interface. 
Power supply 8 V DC
Signal level Hiperface® - specification of operation data channel
(~1Vss; REFSIN/REFCOS 2.5V)

1 GND encoder supply
2 + 8V encoder supply
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 COS +
6 Reserved
7 SIN -
8 SIN +
9 COS -
10 Temperature sensor + 1) 2)
11 Temperature sensor - 1) 2)
12 RS485 +
13 Reserved
D-sub socket 15-pin
14 Reserved
15 RS485 -
* do not assign
1)

KTY84 - SELV/PELV
NTC (MSKL) R = 1 k at Tprotection, Imax < 2mA SELV/PELV
2)
NOTE
At use of module in connection with pre-assembled Baumüller encoder cables the
temperature sensor is not connected to the encoder cable! 
You can connect the temperature sensor separately at the module (in the D-sub con-
nector) or at the power unit.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
m BM4-F-ENC-03; 5 V square wave incremental encoder-plug-in module

Power supply 5 V DC
Signal level RS422 (TTL)

3 RS422 incremental encoder track +0
4 RS422 incremental encoder track -0
5 RS422 incremental encoder track +B
6 Reserved*
7 RS422 incremental encoder track -A
8 RS422 incremental encoder track +A
9 RS422 incremental encoder track -B
10 Reserved*
11 Reserved*
12 Sense + 5V encoder supply
13 Sense GND encoder supply
D-sub-Tube 15-pin
14 Reserved*
15 Reserved*
* do not assign

Installation 7
m BM4-F-ENC-04; Sine-cosine encoder module with zero point sensing
Power supply 8 V DC, stabilized to + 5 V at the encoder

Signal level ~1Vss
Permitted current input max. 250 mA (max. 300 mA)

3 Zero point +
4 Zero point -
5 SIN + [B +]
6 Reserved*
7 COS - [A -]
8 COS + [A +]
9 SIN - [B -]
10 Reserved*
11 Reserved*
12 5 V Sense
13 0 V Sense
D-sub socket 15-pin 14 Reserved*
15 Reserved*
* do not assign
NOTE
A broken wire of the zero point cable is not detected by the controller.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
m BM4-F-ENC- 05; Sine-cosine encoder module EnDat® 2.1

The sine-cosine encoder module is provided with a bidirectional, synchronous-serial En-
Dat® interface via the position data and parameters with a data rate of max. 2MBit/s are
exchanged between control electronics and encoder.

Signal level ~1Vss

3 Temperature sensor +1)
4 Temperature sensor - 1)
5 SIN + [B +]
6 Reserved
7 COS - [A -]
8 COS + [A +]
9 SIN - [B -]
10 Clock +
11 Clock -
12 5 V Sense
13 0 V Sense
D-sub socket 15-pin 14 Data +
15 Data-
* do not assign
1)

KTY84 - SELV/PELV
NTC (MSKL) R = 1 k at Tprotection, Imax < 2mA SELV/PELV

Installation 7
m BM4-F-ENC- 06; Encoder module EnDat® 2.2
The encoder module is only provided with a bidirectional, synchronous-serial EnDat®-in-
terface via the position data and parameters with a data rate of max. 8 MBit/s are ex-
changed between control electronics and encoder. 
Some encoders are listed in ZEncoder modules slot/position A and B– on page 123. 
Power supply 8 V DC, stabilized to +5 V at the encoder


1 not assigned
3 not assigned
4 +5 V encoder supply
5 DATA +
6 not assigned
7 not assigned
8 CLK +
9 not assigned
11 not assigned
13 DATA -
D-sub socket 15-pin 14 not assigned
15 CLK -
NOTE
Encoder cable for EnDat® 2.2 without incremental signals (original encoder cable of
Heidenhain), see ZEncoder cables– from page 307.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
m BM4-F-ENC- 07; Sine-cosine encoder module SSI without encoder supply

The sine-cosine encoder module is provided with a synchronous-serial SSI standard in-
changed between control electronics and encoder. 
All encoders are listed in ZEncoder modules slot/position A and B– on page 123. 
can be used:
Power supply external encoder power supply

Signal level ~1 Vss

1 Reserved*
2 Reserved*
3 Reserved*
4 Reserved*
5 SIN + [B +]
6 Reserved
7 COS - [A -]
8 COS + [A +]
9 SIN - [B -]
10 Clock +
11 Clock -
12 Reserved*
13 A_GND
15 Data-
* do not assign
NOTE
The connection cable is not offered by Baumüller and must be made by the user!

Installation 7
Instruction:
1 Use the following materials:

m Cable: LIYCY 5 x (2 x 0.14) + 2 x 0.5 mm², Cu braiding with at least 85 % opt. overlap
m D-sub connector: 15-pin, male
m Suitable encoder plug
2 Connect the cable shield with the cabinet of the circular connector and with the shield
of the D-sub connector
Figure 92: Connection cable BM4-F-ENC-07

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
m BM4-F-ENC- 17; Sine-cosine encoder module SSI with 5 V encoder supply

The sine-cosine encoder module is provided with a synchronous-serial SSI standard in-
changed between control electronics and encoder. All encoders, are listed in ZEncoder
modules slot/position A and B– on page 123, may be used:
Power supply 8 V DC, stabilized to +5 V at the encoder

Signal level ~1 Vss

3 Reserved*
4 Reserved*
5 SIN + [B +]
6 Reserved
7 COS - [A -]
8 COS + [A +]
9 SIN - [B -]
10 Clock +
11 Clock -
12 5 V Sense
13 0 V Sense
15 Data-
* do not assign
NOTE

Installation 7
Instruction:

m D-sub connector. 15-pin, male
Abbildung 93: Connection cable BM4-F-ENC-17

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
m BM4-F-ENC- 27; Encoder module SSI with 24 V encoder supply

The encoder module is provided with a synchronous-serial SSI standard interface via the
position data and parameters with a data rate of max. 1 MBit/s are exchanged between
control electronics and encoder. All encoders, are listed in ZEncoder modules slot/posi-
tion A and B– on page 123, may be used:
Power supply 24 V DC, according encoder specification +0.5 V

Signal level differential
(encoder)
Pin assignment encoder supply Pin no. Pin assignment

1 +24 V DC
2 0V
1
X1 Socket 2-pin
Pin assignment encoder Pin no. Pin assignment

1 Data -
2 Data +
3 Reserved*
4 Reserved*
5 Reserved*
6 +24 V DC
7 0V
8 Clock +
9 Clock -
X2 D-sub socket 9-pin * do not assign
NOTE
Only if the cable break monitoring is supported (see ProDrive, page „Slot identifica-
tion“) and if the cable break monitoring is activated (see parameter handbook P0573)
both cable break and missing of the 24V power supply and a cable break in Data+/
Data- is identified. Otherwise the availability of the 24 V power supply is not checked
and a broken cable is not detected by the controller.

Installation 7
NOTE
Instruction:

m Cable: 6 leads (recommended: 2 x (2 x 0.14) + 2 x 0.5 mm², trunk cable in pairs and
screened, tinned Cu braiding with at least 85% opt. overlap
m Suitable encoder plug, circular connector, 7-pin, female
6 1
7 2
8 3
9 4
5
1 1
2 2
8 3
9 4
6 0,5 mm² 5
7 0,5 mm² 6
4
1 2
6 5
7 3
Encoder plug, e. g. Temposonics

Plug view
Figure 94: Connection cable BM4-F-ENC-27

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
m BM4-F-ENC- 08; Sine-cosine encoder module with commutation

To this encoder module you can connect sine-cosine encoders with sinusoidal commuta-
tion. Encoders are listed in ZEncoder modules slot/position A and B– on page 123. 
can be used:

Signal level Incremental encoder signals (A and B) ~1Vss
Commutation signals (C and D) ~1Vss

2 + 5 V encoder supply
3 Zero point + [R+]
4 Zero point - [R-]
5 COS + [A +]
6 Reserved*
7 SIN - [B -]
8 SIN + [B +]
9 COS - [A -]
10 D-
11 D+
12 5 V Sense
13 0 V Sense
D-sub socket 15-pin 14 C+
15 C-
* do not assign
NOTE
A broken wire of the reference signal cable [R+], [R-] or commutation signal cable
[C+], [C-], [D+], [D-] is not detected by the controller
NOTE

Installation 7
Instruction:

Abbildung 95: Connection cable BM4-F-ENC-08

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.11.2 Analog input slot/position D and E
NOTE!
The module AIO-01 is always integrated in ES controller (position E, connector X4).
The module AIO-02, 03 or 04 can be ordered at position D.
The module BM4-F-AIO-01 can be plugged in slot E in standard controller. The mod-
ule BM4-F-AIO-02, 03 or 04 can be plugged in slot D or E.
NOTE!
Choose position E in ProDrive for configuration of analog inputs/outputs AIO-01 (con-
nector X4)in ES controller.
Further information referring to analog inputs/outputs, see manual BM4-F-AIO-XX
(5.01045).
Pin assignment Pin No. Pin assignment

1 IN 1 +
2 IN 2 +
3 OUT 1 - , OUT 2 -
4 OUT 1 +
5 OUT 2 +
6 IN 1 -
7 IN 2 -
8 OUT 1 - , OUT 2 -
9 OUT 1 - , OUT 2 -
D-sub male terminal 9-pin
Max. cross-section Connection technology

of connection
0.25 mm2 D-sub female, 9-pin,
metal type or metalized

Installation 7
BM4-F-AIO-
01 02 03 04
No of inputs 2
No of I/O assignments input 2
Resolution 10 bit / 12 bit 16 bit 12 bit 16 bit
Type Differenzeingang
Input resistance ca. 50 k ca. 100 
Max. input current 200 µA 20 mA
Min. input current 4 mA
Sampling rate inputs, one input used 125 µs
Sampling rate inputs, both input used 250 µs
Analog input voltage -10 V bis +10 V 2V
No of outputs 2 1)
No of I/O assignments output 2
Max. output current 1 mA
Resolution 8 bit 16 bit 12 bit 16 bit
Update rate fast outputs 125 µs
Update rate slow outputs 8 ms
Short-circuit current capability output limited short-circuit proof (max. 10 s)
Analog output voltage -10 V bis +10 V
1)
The analog output speed can be changed from „slow output“ to „fast output“ by the operation software and
vice versa.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
7.11.3 Digital inputs slot A to E/position D
NOTE!
The module DIO/FIO can used only in position D of ES controller.
The module BM4-F-DIO/FIO can be used in all slots of the standard controller, but
preferred should be slot D.
NOTE!
Further information referring to digital inputs/outputs, see manual BM4-F-DIO/FIO
(5.01046).
Pin assignment Pin No. Pin assignment

1 IN 1
2 IN 2
3 IN 3
4 IN 4
5 OUT 1
6 OUT 2
7 OUT 3
8 OUT 4
9 +24 V
10 M 24 V
Multi-pin connector 10-pin
Max. cross-section Connection technology

of connection
1.5 mm2 Connector, 10-pin
Figure 96: Skinning length

Installation 7
DIO-01 / DIO-11 1) FIO-01 / FIO-11 1)

Power supply 24 V (19 to 28 V) 3)
Current consumption (24 V) 2.0 A
Current consumption (internal) max. 50 mA
No. of inputs 4
Evaluation inputs edges (2 inputs can be used for writing on one parameter)
Number of I/O-linking groups input 4
Max. input current 2 mA 5 mA
(Typical) transit time delay, input side 4 ms 10 µs
Digital input voltage 0 (LOW) = 0 to 5 V;
1 (HIGH) = 12 to 28 V
Number of outputs 4
Number of I/O-linking groups output 4
Max. output current 0.5 A
Resistance to short circuiting at outputs yes, limited by current with tripping 2)
1)
Unlike DIO/FIO-01 inside DIO/FIO-11 the contact „ground external“ is not connected to PE.
2)
On tripping, there appears an error message on the controller.
3)
Limit the current to 2.5 A. (Due to this also UL 508 C with a maximum current of 4 A will be considered).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358

8 OPERATION
8.1 Safety notes
Basic information
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to improper operation!
Improper operation can lead to severe personal injury or material damage.
Therefore:
m Perform all operational steps according to the details of these instruction hand-
book.
m Before beginning any work, ensure that all coverings and protective devices are
installed and are functioning properly.
m The control cabinet in which the device is installed should be protected against
contact with electrically live parts.
Keep all doors of the control cabinet closed during operation.
NOTICE!
Environmental conditions that do not meet the requirements.
Environmental conditions that are non-compliant can lead to property damage.
Therefore:
m Ensure that the environmental conditions are kept compliant during operation (see
ZRequired environmental conditions– on page 55).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
8.2 Operating concept
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to insufficient qualifications!
Inevitably, when operating this electrical device, certain parts of this device are ener-
gized with hazardous voltage. Improper handling can lead to significant personal in-
jury and material damage.
Therefore:
m Only qualified personnel may work on this device!
8.2 Operating concept
After the device has been commissioned it is parameterized (i.e. adapted to the applica-
tion). Once parameterization has been completed, the device can be operated with one
of the two following operation systems:
System 1 m Two enable signals (see ZEnable signals– on page 224) via digital inputs/outputs
System 2 m Two enable signals (see ZEnable signals– on page 224) via digital inputs/outputs
m Higher level control, which controls the two enable signals and in addition give com-
mands via digital inputs/outputs and/or e.g. the field bus.
The operating software ProDrive is not necessary during operation.

The operating software ProDrive is only necessary, if an error occurs or if parameters
have to be changed. In case of an error the service engineer can, with the help of Pro-
Drive determine the error.
8.2.1 Enable signals
These signals must have a signal level of 24 V (DC) and must be connected to the termi-
nals X3-4 and X3-5 (ZFigure 91– on page 196).
Pulse enable During operation the signal „pulse enable“ must constantly be available, so that the de-
vice supplies power. Additionally the pulse enable has to be generated by the controller.
Both signals are AND-linked, so the failure of one of these signals results in impulse in-
hibit of the power unit.
Quick stop Disable the signal „quick stop“ only, if you must stop the installation/device as quick as
possible.
During operation the signal „quick stop“ must be available, so that the device supplies
power.

Operation 8
8.3 Power on switching frequency / DC link charging
8.3.1 Power supply switch-on frequency BM441X and BM442X
The devices use a rectifier with 6 diodes (B6U circuit). There is a resistor between rectifier
and DC link capacitor limiting the charging surge. The resistor is bridged by a relay after
the charging. Smaller waiting periods between the DC link discharge and charge reduce
the lifetime of the devices. The specified waiting time of the device is increased to at least
90 seconds when an additional external DC link capacitance is connected. The maximum
permitted external DC link capacitance depends on the power supply voltage (see ZFig-
ure 32– on page 65 or ZFigure 34– on page 69).
8.3.2 Power supply switch-on frequency BM443X (Generation 1)
Refer to ZExplanation version code– on page 130.

The devices use a rectifier with 3 diodes and 3 thyristors (B6HK circuit). From the voltage
on the thyristors a sawtooth shaped voltage with power supply frequency is generated.
This synchronous voltage is compared with a voltage decreasing from a start value to 0 V
within ca. 10 seconds. If the current values of both voltages are equal, a thyristor is turned
on and current flows from power supply to the DC link capacitor.
The maximum chargeable total capacity is limited by the power rating of the thyristors and
diodes to 20 mF.
The thyristors are fired if the DC link charge is finished and a voltage drops in reverse di-
rection on the thyristors.
When using the recommended fuses the rectifier is protected against overcurrent de-
struction.
When observing the limits of amplitude and frequency of power supply voltage and the
value of the external capacity and the mounting of the recommended power choke the
user ensures, that the input rectifier is operated in the permitted operating range.
The phase sequence, meaning clockwise rotating field or counterclockwise rotating field,
is not relevant for charging the DC link and the operation of the device.
Below, the behavior described in the former paragraphs is characterized as „time-con-
trolled charge procedure“.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
8.3.3 Power supply switch-on frequency BM443X generation 2, BM4X4X to BM4X7X
h up to
BM 4 4 4 X - X X X - XXXXX[Ryy] - [XXX] - XX[xx] - 4005 -X-XXX-XXX
BM 4 4 7 X - X X X - XXXXX[Ryy]
BM 4 7 X X - X X X - XXXXX[Ryy]
Above shown character string shows the type code on the type plate. The bold group of
four strings (fifth segment of type code) determines the power unit’s technical status. All
devices with type to 4005-, -5003- and -6003- use the before mentioned time-controlled
charge procedure and behave similar to BM443X, but the charging time of the DC link is
approximately 1 second.
Instead of the technical status shown directly on the type plate, the version of the power
unit firmware can be shown in ProDrive (page power unit, top left, device data: firmware
version). Up to version 03.06 ZPower supply switch-on frequency BM443X (Generation
1)– from page 225.
h from
BM 4 6 3 2 - X X X - XXXXX[Ryy]
BM 4 7 X X - X X X - XXXXX[Ryy]
For technical status higher than the above mentioned, an alternative procedure is imple-
mented.
This version of the power unit firmware can be shown in ProDrive. It is 04.00 and higher.
The devices use a rectifier with 3 diodes and 3 thyristors (B6HK circuit). The circuit mea-
sures the voltage on the phase conductor and the DC link. The corresponding thyristor is
fired, if the phase conductor voltage minus DC link voltage is lower than a fixed threshold.
Thereby an almost constant voltage time area is applied to the series connection of phase
conductor and DC link capacitor. The charge of the DC capacitor is done with current
pulses of approx. same level. This level depends on the inductance of the commutation
choke, the impedance of the power supply and the power supply voltage. The thyristors
are fired, if the DC link is charged to 50 V difference between peak power supply voltage
and DC link voltage and there is a potential drop in blocking direction. The thyristor shows
a behavior like a diode.

Operation 8
8.3.4 Calculation of the maximum permitted external capacity
If a maximum allowable external capacity is specified in the technical characteristics, then

it is either a device with diode rectification or one with the „old“ charge circuit (time con-
trolled charging). If, however, it is referred on this chapter the maximum external DC link
capacitance is calculated as followed prescribed.
HINWEIS!
Please check first if it is a device with the old charge circuit (see ZPage 226–).
Should it be such a device of the sizes 3 to 6, then it is to consider that the maximum
permitted capacity on the DC link (device internal capacity plus external capacity) has
not to be larger than 20 mF.
The time for a charge sequence depends on the height of the charging current pulses and
also the height of the internal and external capacity (see ZTable of charging times– on
page 228). After 20 seconds the charging is discontinued.
For the charging function the device must be connected to a power supply with clockwise
rotating field. No charging is started in case of counterclockwise rotating field. In rare cas-
es a counterclockwise rotating field can cause an abrupt charging and a tripped fuse.
No charging is started at failure of one or two mains phases.
The external chargeable capacity is not limited because the height of the loading current
of the DC link capacitor is approx. constant. But the time until the complete charge of the
DC link is increased proportional to the capacity, that has to be charged. Error 089 („pow-
er unit not ready-to-operate“ is generated, if the charging is not finished after 20 s.
Example: BM4443 on 480 V.

From ZTable of charging times– on page 228 results a charge time of 0.4 s with the built
in capacity of 1880 µF.
20s
Maximum external capacity = built in capacity   ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- – 1
Charging time according table
20s
= 1880µF   ------------ – 1 = 92mF
 0.4 s 
It is recommended to choose the external capacity 20 % lower, because the charging

time can vary depending on the height of the power supply voltage.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
8.3.5 Effects of the different charging circuits
Following incompatibilities result because of charging and must be checked by the user
operating devices with the new current-controlled charging-method.
m Charging time: Adapt timeout values in master-control to avoid possible error messag-
es because of not in time ready-to-operate signal.
m Ensure clockwise-rotating-field. The device does not identify the direction of the rotat-
ing field. 
In case of a counter-clockwise-rotating-field no charging is done, after 20 s the attempt
of charging is stopped and error 089 (power unit not ready-to-operate) is generated. 
In rare cases a counterclockwise rotating field can cause an abrupt charging and a
tripped fuse.
For error correction two power supply phases must be exchanged, e. g. the cables
connected to 1U1 and 1V1. The error is corrected, assumed there is no other error.
The advantages of the current-controlled charging are (in short):
m The maximum chargeable DC link capacitance is higher than without the current-con-
trolled charging.
m The dependency of the DC link capacitance on the charging current is reduced. The
self-protection level of the device against incorrect dimensioning is improved.
8.3.6 Table of charging times
Device Inductance Internal Typical Typical Typical Typical

power choke capacity charging charging charging charging time
time time time at 530 V
at 300 V at 400 V at 480 V
BM4632 0.19 mH 3000 µF 0.08 s 0.18 s 0.34 s 0.48 s
BM4443 0.36 mH 1880 µF 0.1 s 0.22 s 0.4 s 0.56 s
BM4444 0.26 mH 2350 µF 0.1 s 0.22 s 0.42 s 0.5 s
BM4445 0.26 mH 3055 µF 0.11 s 0.26 s 0.47 s 0.65 s
BM4642
BM4446 0.18 mH 3760 µF 0.09 s 0.22 s 0.4 s 0.57 s
BM4452 0.26 mH 3000 µF 0.11 s 0.25 s 0.47 s 0.66 s
BM4453 0.18 mH 3000 µF 0.08 s 0.18 s 0.32 s 0.45 s
BM4454 105 µH 6600 µF 0.1 s 0.24 s 0.4 s 0.58 s
BM4652
BM4755
BM4462 105 µH 6000 µF 0.09 s 0.22 s 0.38 s 0.52 s
BM4463 80 µH 6000 µF 0.07 s 0.16 s 0.29 s 0.4 s
BM4466 80 µH 13.2 mF 0.14 s 0.33 s 0.61 s 0.86 s
BM4766
BM447X 39 µH 19.8 mF 0.12 s 0.29 s 0.51 s 0.7 s
BM477X 32.6 µH 19.8 mF 0.1 s 0.24 s 0.4 s 0.58 s

9 TROUBLESHOOTING AND FAULT
CORRECTION
9.1 Behavior in case of malfunctions
Basic information
DANGER!
hazardous voltage.
Therefore:
m Pay heed to areas on the device that could be dangerous.
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to improper fault correction!
Therefore:
m Only qualified personnel may work on this device!
m Personnel that work with the b maXX device must be trained in the safety regula-
tions and the handling of the device, and be familiar with the correct operation of
it. In particular, reacting to error indications and conditions requires that the oper-
ator must have special knowledge.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.2 Monitoring functions
A survey of the most important monitoring functions and the generated warning/error
messages you will find in the following table. How to identify the error is explained in
ZFault detection– from page 234.
Threshold adjustable
Reaction adjustable
limit in parameters
Activation by
Adjusting of 
parameter
Reaction
Warning
Error
Monitoring function Warning/error
Power supply voltage 6) Power supply undervoltage X X - - IS - -

Power supply overvoltage X X - - IS - -
Phase monitoring 6) Phase failure X X - - IS - -
Power failure X X X - IS2) P0486 P0486
Ground fault 1) Fault current to ground - X - - IS - -
Overcurrent Overcurrent motor - X - - IS - -
DC link DC link overvoltage - X - - IS - -
DC link undervoltage relative X - - - - - -
Overload monitoring Peak current  X - - - - - -
not possible at the moment
Temperature heat sink Temperature > threshold 1 X - X - - P0018 -
Temperature > shutdown threshold - X - - IS P0019 -
Temperature internal Temperature > threshold 1 X - X - - P0016 -
space
Temperature > shutdown threshold - X - - IS P0017 -
Temperature motor I2t-threshold exceeded - X - - IS P0073 P0093
Threshold 1 exceeded 3) X - X - - P0088 P0093
Threshold 2 exceeded 3) X - X - - P0089 P0093
Short circuit sensor or temp. < -30 °C 3) - X - - - - P0093
Sensor not connected or temp. > 250 °C 3) - X - - - - P0093
Maximum temperature exceeded 3) - X X - IS P0090 P0093
1) IS: Pulse inhibit
Not available at BM441X and BM442X
SH: Quick stop
2) Pulse inhibit is generated after adjustable time period X: implemented
3)
Only when using the KTY/PT1000 sensor -: not possible
4)
Adjustable with P0299
5) Adjustable with P0298
6)
Not available at power modules

Troubleshooting and fault correction 9
Threshold adjustable
Reaction adjustable
limit in parameters
Activation by
Adjusting of 
parameter
Reaction
Warning
Error
Monitoring function Warning/error
Position controller Position deviation dynamic - X X - SH P1054 P1050

Position deviation static - X X - SH P1055 P1050
Digital output Short-circuit digital output - X - - - - -
4)
Controller  Controller not synchronous with external X X X X P0533 P0299
synchronizing signal
Encoder 1 Cable break - X - - IS - -
Cable break (sin2 + cos2) - X - - IS - -
Overspeed - X X - IS P1072 -
Encoder 2 Cable break - X - - IS - -
2 2
Cable break (sin + cos ) - X - - IS - -
Overspeed - X X - IS P1082 -
Ramp-up  Error at module initialization - X X - IS P0838 P0838
option modules
5)
Cyclical set value trans- Transmission timeout - X X X P0839 P0298
mission to the optional
modules
Safety relay Supply voltage is missing or  - X - - IS - -
safety relay faulty
Safety relay - warning X - - - - - -
Blocking monitoring Drive blocked - X X - IS P1260 P1260
1) IS: Pulse inhibit
Not available at BM441X and BM442X
SH: Quick stop
2)
Pulse inhibit is generated after adjustable time period X: implemented
3) Only when using the KTY/PT1000 sensor -: not possible
4)
5)
6)
Not available at power modules

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Power supply  - not available at power modules

voltage This monitoring function checks, if the power supply voltage has a value within the adjust-
ed voltage range. If the value is lower, the warning „undervoltage power supply“ is gen-
erated. If the value is higher the warning „overvoltage power supply“ is generated.
Phase monitoring - not available at power modules

This monitoring function checks the three phases of the power supply voltage.
If a phase is missing, the warning „phase failure“ is reported to the controller. The reac-
tion time between the phase failure and the error message of the controller is max. 50 ms.
If all three phases are missing the warning „power supply failure“ is reported to the con-
troller. The reaction time between the power supply failure and the error message of the
controller is max. 50 ms. After reaching the adjusted delay time of parameter P0486 the
controller generates the error message „power supply failure“.
Ground fault This monitoring function checks, if there is a short-circuit between the motor terminals and
the ground. If a short-circuit is detected, there is immediately a pulse inhibit.
This monitoring function doesn’t exist by BM441X and BM442X.
Overcurrent This monitoring function checks, if the motor current is greater than 1.3 x output peak cur-
rent. It serves as „Disaster prevention“ in case of an output-sided short-circuit.
DC link This monitoring function checks the voltage of the DC link. In case the voltage is below a
value, which was internally specified (about 50 V under the set value), the warning DC
link undervoltage is generated by the controller. In case the voltage exceeds an adjusted
value about 820 V, the error „DC link overvoltage“ is signaled by the controller and the
pulses are inhibited immediately.
Overload  This monitoring function checks the current calculated load thereupon, if the power unit
monitoring can provide the peak current at the moment. In case the peak current is not possible, the
message „Power unit overload“ is generated.
Temperature This monitoring function checks the temperature in the internal space of the device.
device m In case the temperature is higher than the warning threshold, the controller generates
internal space a warning.
m In case the temperature is too high, the pulses are inhibited immediately.
Temperature This monitoring function checks the temperature of the heat sink.
heat sink m In case the temperature is higher than the warning threshold, the controller generates
a warning.
m In case the temperature is too high, the pulses are inhibited immediately.

Temperature  This monitoring function checks the temperature of the motor. In case the I2t threshold is
motor exceeded, the error „I2t overload“ is generated by the controller.
Only for If the set temperature threshold 1 is exceeded, then the warning „Temperature threshold
KTY84 and PT1000 1 exceeded“ is generated by the controller.
sensor
If the set temperature threshold 2 is exceeded, then the warning „Temperature threshold
2 exceeded“ is generated by the controller.
If the temperature falls below the minimum measurable value, or if a short circuit occurs
at the sensor, then the error message „Temperature sensor short circuit“ is generated.
If the temperature exceeds the maximum measurable temperature, or if the sensor is not
connected, then the error message „Temperature sensor not connected“ is generated by
the controller.
For all  If the threshold set (type-specific) in the temperature switch or in the sensor is exceeded,
sensors then the error message „Over temperature“ is generated by the controller and the pulses
are inhibited immediately.
Position controller This monitoring function checks the position deviation limit statical/dynamical. In case the
position deviation error is statical/dynamical greater than the set position deviation error
limit, there is an error message „position deviation error statical“ and „position deviation
error dynamical“. After monitoring time (position deviation time), additionally an error
message is generated and the pulses are inhibited immediately.
Safety relay This monitoring function checks if the safety relay is ready and if the control voltage in
order to activate the safety relay is connected. In case of an error the controller either gen-
erates an error or a warning, depending on, if the pulse enable is active or not.
Blocking This monitoring function checks the motor speed and the motor current. 
monitoring If, for the period of time „blocking monitoring time“, the following two conditions are ful-
filled, the error/warning „drive blocked“ is generated by the controller and the pulses are
inhibited immediately.
m Motor speed = 0
m The motor current which is supplied by the device is equal to the set motor limit current
(current limit).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.3 Fault detection
9.3 Fault detection
The fault can be caused by mechanical or electrical malfunctions.
LED H4 The occurrence of an error state is signalized by the lighting up of the red LED H4 on the
front side of the housing of b maXX 4000 devices.
NOTE!
If warnings or errors occur without error reaction the LED H4 „error“ flashes. Only er-
ror messages with error reaction are displayed by constantly lighting up.
7-segment display Additionally the error code is shown via the 7-segment display on the front side of the
housing (not BM4XXX - XXX - XX0XX and BM4XXX - XXX - XX1XX).
By the displayed code the error message can be determined with help of ZError param-
eters, error messages, error reactions– from page 240. The displayed error is without ex-
ception an LEVEL 2 error (P0201 - P0216).
The display of an error code starts therewith, that „F“ is displayed for 1.5 s. Then the three
characters of the error code are displayed. The separate characters are displayed for
about 0.8 s, interrupted by a short break. If there are other errors, these are displayed in
the same manner. The procedure is repeated as soon as all errors were displayed.
Example: Error 125 and 91 are generated:
Start End Time

Error code
display
Figure 97: Error messages 7-segment display

Operating  Furthermore the error message is shown in the operating software:
software ProDrive
h Start the operating program ProDrive (from FW 3.07), if it isn’t running yet.
NOTE!
The controller software version and the operating software version must be compat-
ible to use ProDrive with all functions.
In case the software version of the controller and the ProDrive version is not compatible,
following message is displayed (also see online help ProDrive):
Figure 98: ProDrive version conflict
NOTE!
Please contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH or visit our website www.baumueller.de
for download the latest version of ProDrive, if the controller software version is not
available in your ProDrive version.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.3 Fault detection
Start screen
Figure 99: ProDrive start screen
Display the „error message“ in ProDrive.
h Open navigation with click on + in front of „Management“.
Figure 100: Project navigation in ProDrive

h Select „Drive management“
The window „Drive manager“ opens, see below with an exemplary (error) message.
Before the communication between controller and PC/laptop is started, the messages in
in this list have been arranged in numerical order. The newly occurring messages are
added to the end of the list, when communication is active.
Figure 101: Drive manager ProDrive
NOTE
If you are not able to start the motor, although the red LED H4 is not lighting up and
although the LED H2 is lighting up green, check the parameterization of the
b maXX 4000 with the parameter list in ProDrive.
Error possibilities are e. g.: torque limit = 0 has been set or notch position is not cor-
rect (also see parameter manual b maXX 4000).
If no LEDs are lighting up on the front side of the device, check the 24V supply.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling
9.4 Error handling
The error messages in the system are built up hierarchically

An error message can result from a beneath in the hierarchic arranged error message.
This is why the message „Error“ (level 1) can base on an error, which e. g. has appeared
in „ModuleError“ (level 2), because there is a failure in „Function module1“ (level 3, e. g.
SinCos-encoder module).
Error memory From firmware 3.11 onwards an internal error memory exists to read out errors by a high-
er-level open-loop control. All occurrent errors which lead to an error response of the drive
are saved chronologically in this error memory.
A read access to the error memory is done element by element with an index parameter
(P0258) and a value parameter (P0259).
The error memory will be deleted completely at error acknowledgment (bit No.7 = 1 in
control word).
For a further description see parameter P0257 in the Parameter Manual.
Error display If an error appears, the according definite error message is displayed within a short time
in ProDrive in the menu „device manager“ and on the 7-segment display.
NOTE!
The device is provided with predefined error reactions. You are able to set the error
reaction of the device in „Depending on settings“ in the column „Reaction“ marked er-
ror messages. An exception here are errors, which have to have an immediate pulse
inhibit as a consequence. These can not be changed due to safety reasons.

9.4.1 Error reset
If the red error LED is lighting up, there is at least one error.
There are several methods to reset errors:
m Via ProDrive (from FW 3.07):
Button „Quit errors“ (either in the dialog box „Device manager“ or on the page “Device
manager“. 
That means, that you inform the device, that you have noted the error, that you have
removed it or that you want to pass over it. Due to error reset all error messages are
reset. An individual error reset is not possible. The button Quit errors causes a resetting
of the error, in case the cause for the error message exists no longer.
Figure 102: ProDrive Drive manager
m Via writing access to control word (P0300):

Here a rising edge must be generated in bit 7 (generated by the control system or by
operating software via input to parameter list). 
Note: The drive control must be active (see parameter P1001 Communication source)
for the selected communication source.
m Via a digital input:
A digital input of a DIO module can be selected via parameter P0575 digital input for
error acknowledgement can be selected for error reset. A rising edge on this input re-
sets the error messages.
m Via the pulse enable input:
Precondition is, that the drive is only controlled via the hardware inputs (that means
that the motor guide is neither set via the operating software nor via another commu-
nication source). Furthermore the option “Quit error via pulse enable” in parameter
P1002 Options device manager must be active. With the first rising edge of pulse en-
able the errors then are reset. But the drive still does not start. Therefore you then need
a second rising edge for the enable.
Additional data according the subject resetting of error messages is available in the „pa-
rameter manual“.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling
9.4.2 Error parameters, error messages, error reactions
Figure 103: Survey error list

1st level 1st level errors are only interesting for the access to errors via parameters, to be used
without ProDrive, e. g. at Field bus communication. This errors are not shown in ProDrive/
7-segment display.
Bit mapping see description of the parameter P0200 in the parameter manual.
2nd level Order of the error messages see survey (ZFigure 103– on page 240).
3rd level 2nd level error messages are displayed on the 7-segment display in ProDrive.
NOTE!
3rd level errors are only displayed in ProDrive separated by a decimal point from the
corresponding 2nd level error.
e.g.:
Motor error 102: Group error find notch position (2nd level)

Find notch position error 102.64: Drive moved more than 4 times delta angle.
(3rd level)
9.4.2.1 Error messages (2nd level)
In the column „Reaction“ the reaction of the system to the error is shown:
m „IS“ = pulse inhibit;
m „adjustable“ = the error reaction can be set via ProDrive (Window „Drive management“,
toolbar button „Error reaction“).
m „no reaction“ means, the drive is continuing to work and the red error LED is blinking.
P0201 Error processor
Error No. Meaning Reaction Troubleshooting

0 reserved
1 Watchdog error IS Restart b maXX 4000
2 Incorrect or unexpected interrupt has occurred IS
3 NMI Interrupt / bus error IS
4 to 15 reserved, not assigned = 0

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling
P0202 Error operating system

16 Boot error IS Restart b maXX
17 Software error IS
18 Time slot configuration IS
19 Time slot - time error IS Restart b maXX; 
Change configuration of the time slice operation sys-
tem
20 1 = no free memory IS Restart b maXX
21 Invalid error code IS
22 invalid warning code IS
23 incorrect FPGA version IS Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
24 Two-state controller: error while writing to target IS Ensure that the target parameter is writable in these
parameter operating conditions and the value to write is in the
valid value range.
25 Checksum error flash system data IS The system data in the controller flash is invalid and
was replaced by default values. These default values
are written to the flash by switching off and on.
26 Power unit is not supported IS Use an appropriate power unit or contact Baumüller
Nürnberg GmbH
P203 Error Proprog communication

32 Timeout protocol adjustable Restart b maXX 4000
33 Protocol structure adjustable
34 Wrong module type adjustable Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
35 Too many data in the telegram adjustable
36 Not enough data in telegram adjustable
37 Invalid operand adjustable
38 Invalid memory type adjustable Test RAM
39 Invalid operand address adjustable Enter valid address
40 Value less than the minimum value adjustable Check and adjust data set
41 Value greater than the maximum value adjustable
42 Parameter is write-protected adjustable
43 Parameters in this operation state not writable adjustable Check operating condition and parameterization
44 Invalid parameter value adjustable Enter with a valid value
45 Communication error adjustable Establish connection again or set parameter P0290 to
ProDrive controller 0.

P0204 Error in function or option modules

48 Error in function module A 3rd level see ZError in function module A to E– on page 255 (=
error 3rd level)
49 Error in function module B
50 Error in function module C
51 Error in function module D
52 Error in function module E
53 Error in option module G
54 Error in option module H
55 Error in option module J
56 Error in option module K
57 Error in option module L
58 Error in option module M
59 Timeout when waiting for the RST signal of the IS Restart b maXX 4000
slaves
60 CRC error in SPI transmission  adjustable Error indicates high EMC interferences; please reduce
Module f controller these. 
61 CRC error in SPI transmission  adjustable Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
Controller f module
P0205 Error power supply

64 Power supply failure adjustable Connect the power supply system
65 Phase failure IS Check if all phases are correctly connected and volt-
age-carrying
66 Undervoltage power supply,  IS Assure the compliance with the power supply specifi-
BM4100 only cations (see ZRequirements to the energy supply /
supply system– on page 52)
67 Overvoltage power supply, IS
M4100 only
68 Undervoltage 24 V IS
79 Power supply monitor - group error adjustable See ZError power supply monitor– on page 253 (= 3rd
level)

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling
P0206 Error power unit

®
80 Communication error according Hiperface - IS see ZError power unit - serial interface– on page 250
specification (= 3rd level)
81 Heat sink temperature IS Let the device cool down and/or reduce the load
82 Overvoltage Uzk IS Reduce the DC link voltage
83 Overcurrent IS Reduce the load and check the current controller set-
tings as well as the cabling and the motor
84 Ground current IS Check installation of the device (from b maXX
BM443X) and check the motor for ground fault
85 Device internal temperature too high IS Make sure of a sufficient ventilation in the device and/
or check the temperature of cooling air
86 Cable break internal temperature sensor or IS Make sure the environmental temperature (or heat sink
internal temperature < 5 °C temperature of the device) is  5 °C. If the error occurs
even at a heat sink temperature 5 °C pass on the
device for repair
87 Safety relay off (or defect) IS Check safety relay, change on request
88 Bridge short-circuit IS Restart b maXX 4000. At recurring error messages
exchange the controller
89 Power unit not ready-to-operate IS Make sure that the power unit is ready-to-operate.
Check the rotating field of the power supply
90 Up to FW 03.08 phase failure IS Check the correct connection and voltage level of all
From FW 03.09 reserved phases
91 Power supply failure IS Make power supply available.
From FW 03.09 reserved
92 Power supply undervoltage IS Assure the compliance with the power supply specifi-
93 Power supply overvoltage IS cations (see ZRequirements to the energy supply /
supply system– on page 52)
94 Undervoltage UDC link IS Check power connections
95 reserved, not assigned = 0
P0207 Error motor

96 Short-circuit temperature sensor adjustable Remove the short-circuit in the temperature sensor
(TM  -30 °C)
97 Temperature sensor - motor not connected adjustable Remove open circuit in the temperature sensor circuit
(TM > +300 °C)
98 Motor overtemperature IS Remove motor overtemperature by cooling down and/
or reducing the load
99 Error I2t > 100 % IS Let the drive in a inhibited status until I2t-actual value
decreases under 100 %
100 Power unit maximal current > motor maximal adjustable Set power unit maximal current P1241 lower than
current motor maximal current P0069
101 reserved, not assigned = 0
102 Group error find notch position IS See ZError at finding notch position– on page 254

P0208 Error encoder 1

112 Communication error encoder 1 IS See ZError encoder 1 - serial interface Error encoder 2
- serial interface– on page 251
113 reserved
114 Error at overwriting of  IS Execute the command again. If the error occurs again,
encoder position information contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
115 Cable break encoder 1 IS Remove the cable break in the encoder cable of
encoder 1 or check the assignment of encoder cable
116 Overspeed encoder 1 IS Check the allowable rotational speed for encoder 1
117 Amplitude limit exceeded IS Check the encoder cable and the encoder function.
Use a different encoder
118 Encoder type unknown IS Check if the correct encoder is connected or use
another encoder
119 Invalid data field for motor data IS Use another encoder
120 Incorrect motor data IS
121 Saving error of motor data IS
122 Motor data write-protected IS
123 Field angle error IS Check the shielding of the encoder cable
124 Encoder without temperature measuring adjustable Use an encoder module with temperature sensor
125 Memory capacity in the encoder for electronic adjustable Use another encoder with a greater memory
type plate too small
P0209 Error encoder 2

128 Communication error encoder 2 IS See ZError encoder 1 - serial interface Error encoder 2
- serial interface– on page 251
129 reserved
130 Error at overwriting of  IS Execute the command again. If the error occurs again,
encoder position information contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH.
131 Cable break encoder 2 IS Remove the cable break in the encoder cable of
encoder 2 or check the assignment of encoder cable
132 Overspeed encoder 2 IS Check the allowable rotational speed for encoder 2
133 Amplitude limit exceeded IS Check the encoder cable and the encoder function.
Use a different encoder
134 Encoder type unknown IS Check if the correct encoder is connected or use
another encoder
135 Invalid data field for motor data IS Use another encoder
136 Incorrect motor data IS
137 Saving error of motor data IS
138 Motor data write-protected IS
139 Field angle error IS Check the shielding of the encoder cable
140 Encoder without temperature measuring adjustable Use an encoder module with temperature sensor
141 Memory capacity in the encoder for electronic adjustable Use another encoder with a greater memory
type plate too small

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling
P0210 Error encoder manager

144 Absolute position of encoder 1 unknown IS Use a different encoder
If error occurs at sine incremental encoder, set P0150
145 Absolute position of encoder 2 unknown IS bit 9 = 1 (error message „absolute position of encoder
1 unknown“ is eliminated)
146 Encoder module 1 not available IS Check if the correct encoder is connected to slot A
147 Encoder module 2 not available IS Check if the correct encoder is connected to slot B
148 Encoder module for measured value storage IS Install the encoder module
not available
149 When using a resolver no measured value stor- IS Use a SinCos- or incremental encoder
age possible
150 Triggering not possible, no incremental encoder IS Use for this option an incremental encoder
151 Digital I/O module not available IS Install the digital I/O module
152 Incremental encoder emulation is require but IS Install the incremental encoder emulation module
not available
153 Encoder module 1 is required for incremental IS Install the encoder module on slot A
encoder emulation but not available
154 Encoder module 2 is required for incremental IS Install encoder module on slot B
encoder emulation but not available
155 Initialization error of the incremental encoder IS Restart b maXX 4000
emulation module
156 Incremental encoder emulation module hard- IS Restart b maXX 4000, exchange the module at repeti-
ware signal error tive error messages
157 Error incremental encoder emulation module IS Use for this option an incremental encoder
158 SSI encoder emulation module is not available IS Install SSI encoder emulation module
159 Error in set value source encoder 1 or encoder IS See error messages encoder 1 or 2
2

P0211 Error drive management

160 Timeout communication adjustable Remove the timeout of the Proprog communication
161 Timeout BACI adjustable Remove the timeout of the BACI communication option
module
162 Timeout cyclic communication adjustable Remove the timeout of the Cyclic communication:
163 Timeout service data adjustable
164 Field bus error adjustable Check the field bus communication
165 Controller not synchronous to external signal adjustable Set the Sync offset and/or Sync tolerance
166 Error at brake control IS Check the wiring and the function of the brake
167 No release of holding brake when starting the IS Check the holding brake
drive
168 No closing of holding brake at stopping of drive adjustable
169 Error holding brake status (cyclic monitoring) adjustable
170 Error holding brake lining adjustable
171 Error initialize holding brake IS Check, if there is a DIO module, if it is in the correct
slot and if it is correctly parameterized (also see
P0883)
172 Error holding brake: holding torque not reached IS Ensure that the torque limits are not set too small
|P1402| < Min (|P1036|, |P1037|, |P1038|)
P0212 Error data set management

176 EEPROM copy error adjustable Copy the data set once more
177 Write timeout EEPROM adjustable The data in the EEPROM are invalid, please safe all
data sets
178 Checksum error EEPROM IS EEPROM faulty or described faulty
179 No boot data set IS The data in the EEPROM are invalid, please safe all
data records
180 Incompatible software IS
181 There is no data set adjustable
182 Checksum error im PSI module adjustable PSI EEPROM faulty or write faulty
183 PSI is reset adjustable Please save all data records
184 PSI data invalid adjustable The data in the PSI are invalid, please save all data
sets
185 Autotuning tables invalid. adjustable Restart autotuning
186 A/D correction table invalid adjustable Replace the controller cartridge
187 EEPROM is reset IS The data in the EEPROM is reset, please safe all data
records

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling
P0213 Error position controller

192 Position deviation dynamic adjustable Remove the dynamical position deviation error
193 Position deviation static adjustable Remove the statical position deviation error
194 Encoder 1 is used for position control, but is IS Activate encoder 1/2
inactive. This error is also shown, if the faulty positioning is in
one of the inactive data sets.
195 Encoder 2 is used for position control, but is IS
inactive.
196 Software limit switch 1 exceeded adjustable Check the target position with the travelling range
197 Software limit switch 2 exceeded adjustable enabled by the limit switches
198 Hardware limit switch 1 exceeded adjustable
199 Hardware limit switch 2 exceeded adjustable
200 Homing necessary and not yet executed adjustable Start homing
201 Mode set-of-setpoints,  adjustable Assure, that positioning data and handshake are in
set-of-setpoints not in time time (also see parameter manual)
202 Target position v Modulo position adjustable Minimize target position or
adjust Modulo position P1239
203 Spindle positioning: adjustable Used encoder without trigger signal (zero pulse) or
Error while initialization of the trigger incorrect adjustment in P1425 spindle positioning
mode
204 Spindle positioning: adjustable Check encoder for zero pulse; check encoder connec-
Timeout at trigger signal tor; check zero pulse signal by means of the toggle bit
(encoder 1/2 status bit 8)
205 Error while executing homing adjustable Check the function of the reference switch and the
hardware limit switch; adjust the encoder input selec-
tion where necessary; select only supported homing
methods
206 to 207 not assigned = 0
P0214 Error speed controller

208 Drive blocked IS Remove the blockade of the drive
209 Encoder 1 is parameterized as encoder for the IS You have got to either activate the encoder in the
motor control, but the evaluation is not acti- encoder 1 (modeP0150) or you set the encoder 2 as
vated. This error is also shown, if the faulty set- encoder for the position control (parameter P1030)
ting is in one of the inactive data records.
210 Encoder 2 is parameterized as encoder for the IS You either have got to activate the encoder in the
motor control, but the evaluation is not acti- encoder 2 (P0160) or you set the encoder 1 as
vated. This error is also shown, if the faulty set- encoder for the position control (parameter P1030)
ting is in one of the inactive data records.
211 Overspeed Open loop IS Check parameterization and reduce speed
213 Export restriction: IS Reduce speed
Maximum electrical frequency exceeded

P0215 Error user programmable

224 to 234 not assigned = 0 adjustable
235 Torque coupling: General error in the master adjustable
236 Torque coupling: Operating mode in the slave is IS
not speed control
237 Configuration error reaction return motion is IS
invalid
238 Return motion target position was not reached adjustable
239 Application error  adjustable
(enabled by P0302 bit 1)
P0216 Error CANsync


Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling
9.4.2.2 Sub-error messages (3rd level)
NOTE!
3rd level errors are only displayed in ProDrive separated by a decimal point from the
corresponding 2nd level error (see ZFigure 103– on page 240), exception error pow-
er supply monitor P036 (see ZSeite 253–).
e.g.:
Motor error 102: Group error
Find notch position error 102.64: Drive moved more than 4 times delta angle.
(3rd level)
P0233 Error power unit - serial interface

Error power unit 80: Communication error
Error code Meaning Troubleshooting

6 Data overflow Error indicates high EMC problems; please reduce these. 
Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
7 Bit frame error
8 Invalid command state Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
9 Parity error Restart b maXX 4000
10 Checksum error Error indicates high EMC problems; please reduce these. 
11 Unknown error code
12 Data number error
13 Invalid argument
14 Data field is write protected
15 Invalid access code
16 Data field is not changeable in its size
17 Word address outside of data field
18 Data field is nonexistent
36 Wrong data checksum
37 No response
66 Invalid response Restart b maXX 4000

P0234 Error encoder 1 - serial interface 
P0235 Error encoder 2 - serial interface
Error encoder 1 112: Communication error encoder 1
Error encoder 2 128: Communication error encoder 2

1 Analog signals out of range Check the encoder cable and the encoder connection
2 Error internal angle offset
3 Table data field partitioning destroyed
4 Analog limits not available
5 Internal I2C-bus not operative
6 Internal checksum error
7 Internal watchdog error - encoder reset
8 Overflow of the counter
9 Parity error
10 Checksum error
11 Unknown error code
12 Data number error
13 Invalid argument
14 Data field is write protected
15 Invalid access code
16 Data field is not changeable in its size
17 Word address outside of data field
18 Data field is available
19 to 27 reserved
28 Absolute monitoring of the analog signals Check the encoder cable and the encoder connection
29 Transmission current critical
30 Encoder temperature critical Check motor temperature
31 Speed too high - no position generation possible Check the encoder cable and the encoder connection
32 Position singleturn unreliable Internal encoder error
33 Multiturn position error
36 Incorrect motor temperature check sum Check the encoder cable and the encoder connection
37 No response from encoder
38 Encoder address unknown
39 Error reading the absolute angle position
40 Invalid checksum of received data
41 Unknown encoder type
42 to 63 reserved
64 No response of Hiperface® encoder Check the encoder cable and the encoder connection
65 No response of Hiperface® encoder
66 Undefined response to encoder command
67 Encoder type not accepted Use another encoder type
68 to 79 reserved

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling

80 CRC has generated an error Check the encoder cable and the encoder connection
81 Invalid command
82 Error in response telegram
83 Alarm bit is set Restart b maXX 4000
84 Memory is used Check the encoder cable and the encoder connection
85 Incorrect data checksum
86 Motor data length and/or data version of
encoder and controller firmware are not identi-
cal
87 No EnDat interface
88 Exceeding the evaluable transmission format Use another type of length measurement system
89 Exceeding the evaluable measuring step
90 Signal period length < measuring step length
91 EnDat 2.2: Error initializing master module Exchange module (standard controller) or exchange controller (ES
controller)
92 EnDat 2.2: Timeout measuring the signal trans- Exchange encoder cable or module (standard controller) or change
fer time controller (ES controller)
93 EnDat 2.2: Error - signal transfer compensation Exchange module (standard controller) or exchange controller (ES
is switched-off controller)
94 EnDat 2.2: Encoder type does not support Use suitable encoder type
EnDat2.2 (command set, power supply, clock
frequency)
95 EnDat 2.2: RM bit is not set, reference of
encoder absolute position is not available
96 Error lightning Exchange encoder
97 Error signal amplitude
98 Error position value
99 Error overvoltage Exchange module (standard controller) or exchange controller (ES
controller)
100 Error undervoltage
101 Error overcurrent
102 Error battery Exchange encoder
103 -111 reserved
112 Position error detected at multiple request Check encoder cable or installation
113 Error triggered by additional info 1 Refer to encoder-dependent definition of additional information 1
2 encoders can be connected to a b maXX 4000 at most. Accordingly errors can appear
in function module 1 and function module 2. The term „encoder 1“ or „encoder 2“ in the
column „device part“ stands for one of the five currently existing encoder module types.

P0236 Error power supply monitor
Exception:
More than one bit can be set. ProDrive shows the single errors with bit No. for identifi-
cation instead of error codes.
Error code Bit Meaning Reaction Troubleshooting

1 0 Power supply monitor has detected power fail- adjustable Correct fault in power supply
ure
2 1 Power supply monitor phase failure adjustable
4 2 Power supply monitor has detected undervolt- adjustable
age power supply
8 3 Power supply monitor has detected overvoltage adjustable
power supply
16 4 Power supply monitor has detected power sup- adjustable
ply frequency below/equal than lower frequency
limit
32 5 Power supply monitor has detected power sup- adjustable
ply frequency higher/equal than upper fre-
quency limit

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling
P0237 Error at finding notch position

If the function finding notch position is not completed without error, the motor error 102,
group error finding notch position is generated. 
In this case the following parameter P0237 specifies the error in detail.

1 Overcurrent step 1 Find notch position method 2:
m Error occurs at 180 % of maximum current m Either allow higher current, 
P1241 increase peak current P1241,
m or impress less current, 
reduce amplitude of voltage P2122 (or P2148).
2 Overcurrent step 2 Find notch position method 2:
m Error occurs at 180 % of maximum current m Either allow higher current, 
P1241 increase peak current P1241,
m or impress less current, 
reduce amplitude of voltage P2123 (or P2149).
4 Plausibility step 1
m Find notch position method 0, 3:  Find notch position method 0, 3:
Current is too low or shaft is too immovable or m Check amplitude of current, the movability of the shaft and/or the
the direction of the rotating field P0087 is direction of phase rotation P0087.
wrong.
m Find notch position method 2:  Find notch position method 2:

Following controller does not converge to a m Increase gain of the following controller P2124 (preferred)
steady rotor position (the following controller or/and
should calculate the same value from differ- increase amplitude of voltage P2122 (or P2148). If P2122 (or
ent start values with unchanged rotor posi- P2148) is at maximum already, then reduce the frequency of the
tion) current P2120.
8 Plausibility step 2
m Find notch position method 2: Find notch position method 2:
The measured part of the 2nd harmonic m Increase amplitude of voltage P2123 (or P2149). If P2123 (or
(P2147 from FW 3.10) is less than the mini- P2149) is at maximum already, then reduce the frequency of the
mal level P2125. current P2121.
m If the current is at maximum, then reduce minimum level P2125
(attention: the stability of this method is reduced when setting
the minimal level too low.
m Find notch position method 3: Find notch position method 3:

Drive shaft moves more than 180 ° m Decrease amplitude of current and/or check direction of the
rotating field P0087.
32 Timeout Find notch position method 1:
m Try method 3
Find notch position method 3:

m Increase current rising P3021 and/or decrease waiting time
P2127.
64 Drive moved more than 4 times traverse angle Find notch position method 3:
m Increase the maximum traverse angle P2128 (drives with high
friction, cogging torque, initial break away torque)
m Reduce current increase P3021 and/or speed delta rho P3022
(drives with negligible inertia/friction)
512 Plausibility step 2. Find notch position method 2:
test invalid (from FW 03.10) m Increase amplitude of voltage P2123 (or P2149). If P2123 (or
m The amplitude of the injected signal is too low P2149) is at maximum already, then reduce the frequency of the
to detect the 2nd harmonic current P2121

P0240 to P0244 Error in function module A to E
Error code Meaning Reaction Troubleshooting

0 reserved
1 Module not recognized no Check if you have plugged in the right module at the
reaction right position
2 Recognized module not permitted at this posi- no
tion reaction
3 Digital output short-circuited or 24 V supply not no Check the cabling of the digital outputs
connected at DIO module reaction
4 Invalid target parameter value by digital input no Check the parameterization of the input channel
reaction
5 Direct PLC I/O access for this module not per- no Don’t select the module
mitted. reaction
6 Required module is missing, only for BM4100 IS Connect the required module for active mains rectifier
active mains rectifier unit unit operation - see Operation Manual b maXX
BM4100 Active Mains Rectifier Unit
7 Module must not be used for actual active no
mains rectifier unit mode or controller mode reaction
8 reserved no
reaction
9 Too mach analog I/O modules plugged no More than 2 analog IO modules are not allowed
reaction
10 AIO-04: current < 4 mA no Current supply not connected, cable break or short cir-
reaction cuit
11 AIO-04: current > 20 mA no Current supply supplies a current too high
reaction

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling
P0245 to P0250 Error im option module G to M

4096 Wrong parameter No. at set value parameter 1 adjustable Check the corresponding set value parameter
4097 Wrong parameter No. at set value parameter 2 adjustable
4112 Wrong parameter No. at actual value parameter 1 adjustable
4128 Invalid value at set value parameter No. 1 adjustable Check the set values in relation to the permitted
value range
4129 Invalid value at set value parameter No. 2 adjustable

4140 Invalid value at set value parameter No. 13 adjustable Check the set values in relation to the permitted
value range
4144 Invalid value for set value period adjustable
4145 Invalid value for actual value period adjustable
4146 Incorrect value for cycle offset set values adjustable
4147 Incorrect value for cycle offset actual values adjustable
4148 BACI timeout at cyclic data adjustable Check communication rate and set timeout P0839
4149 BACI timeout at service data adjustable
4150 Check results in faulty checksum IS Restart by switching off and on
4151 Ramp-up timeout when waiting for the slave type or adjustable
when waiting for the resetting of config pending flag
4152 Invalid data transfer structure type adjustable Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
4153 Internal error: Incorrect BACI status adjustable
4154 Access conflicts with slave at cyclic communication adjustable
4155 Error cyclic communication: Parameter value wrong adjustable Check the value of the transmitted parameter
4156 Error cyclic communication: Alive counter conflict adjustable Check if option module and controller are synchro-
nous
4157 Cmd interface: Channel number wrong (0 or > 6) adjustable Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
4158 Cmd interface: Selected channel not available adjustable
4159 Cmd interface: Internal error - wrong pointer adjustable
4160 Cmd interface: Internal error - wrong state adjustable
4161 Cmd interface: Wrong package No. adjustable
4162 Cmd interface: Wrong command No. adjustable
4163 Cmd interface: Wrong state at package handling adjustable
4164 Cmd interface: Timeout at command processing adjustable
4165 Cmd interface: Wrong package length adjustable
4166 Cmd interface: Descriptor not available adjustable
4167 Cmd interface: Wrong package type adjustable
4168 Cmd interface: Checksum error adjustable
4169 Module identification: PCI error at reading adjustable Check option module for correct operation
4170 Module identification: PCI error at writing adjustable
4171 Module identification: General error at reading adjustable
4172 Module identification: General error at writing adjustable
4173 Internal error adjustable Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
4174 Configuration cyclic services: Parameters are not adjustable Select another parameter
cyclic writable
4175 Configuration cyclic services: Invalid parameter No. adjustable
4176 Wrong option module error code adjustable Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
4177 to 8192 reserved

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling
9.4.3 Warnings
P0261 Warning power supply
Warning No. Meaning Troubleshooting

0 not assigned = 0
1 Undervoltage 24 V Assure the compliance with the specifications
2 Undervoltage power supply Assure the compliance with the specifications
(see ZRequirements to the energy supply / supply system– from
page 52)
3 Overvoltage power supply
4 Power failure Power supply troubleshooting

5 Phase failure Check if all phases are correctly connected and voltage-carrying
P0262 Warnings power unit

16 Internal temperature of device Establish the specified environmental conditions, assure correct
ventilation conditions
17 Heat sink temperature Reduce the power output, check the fans of the device
18 Timeout charge process DC link Check the correct order of mains phases (clockwise rotating field!)
and avoid that the DC link supplies energy while charging
19 not assigned = 0
20 Safety relay not enabled Check cabling of safety relay
21 to 22 reserved warning
23 Voltage difference  Check power terminals
power supply - DC link > 40 V
24 Power unit overload Reduce the power output
P0263 Warnings motor

32 Temperature threshold 1 exceeded Reduce the power output of the motor
33 Temperature threshold 2 exceeded
34 I²t threshold exceeded

P0264 Global drive warnings

48 Drive not synchronous
49 to 51 reserved
52 Warning encoder 1 Exchange of the encoder recommended
53 Warning encoder 2 Exchange of the encoder recommended
P0265 Warning Power supply monitor

64 Power supply monitor has detected warning
power failure
65 Power supply monitor has detected warning
phase failure
66 Power supply monitor has detected a lower volt-
age than warning threshold undervoltage power
supply P2058
67 Power supply monitor has detected a higher volt-
age than warning threshold overvoltage power
supply P2059
68 Power supply monitor has detected power supply
frequency below/equal than warning lower fre-
quency limit P2060
69 Power supply monitor has detected power supply
frequency higher than warning upper frequency
limit P2061

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
9.4 Error handling

10 MAINTENANCE
10.1 Safety notes
Basic information
DANGER!
hazardous voltage.
Therefore:
m Pay heed to areas on the device that could be dangerous during the electrical in-
stallation.
m Pay heed to areas on the device that could still be electrically energized after op-
eration.
Figure 104: Hazard areas during electrical installation

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
10.2 Environmental condition
WARNING!
Risk of injury due to improperly performed maintenance work!
Improper maintenance can lead to severe personal injury and material damage.
Therefore:
m Before beginning work, make sure that there is enough space for mounting.
m Make sure that the mounting area is kept clean and orderly. Parts and tools that
are loosely stacked or lying around are a potential accident source.
10.2 Environmental condition
If the prescribed environmental conditions are adhered to, then the device is mainte-
nance-free. For the prescribed environmental conditions see ZRequired environmental
conditions– on page 55.
The most important prescribed environmental conditions are:
m Dust-free environmental air
m Temperature: Min. 5 °C to max. +55 °C
m Relative humidity: 5% to 85%, no condensation
m Installation altitude: From 1000 m and higher derating
10.3 Inspection intervals - maintenance notes
Preventive maintenance is prescribed to keep the device in an optimum operating condi-

tion and ensure a long service life. It is recommended to have inspections performed reg-
ularly by qualified personnel.
Daily  Basic check points as to whether discrepancies have occurred during operation:
inspection: m Does the motor work as desired?
m Is the operating environment normal?
m Is the cooling system working normally?
m If an unusual vibration or noise is noticed during operation.
m Does the motor overheat during operation?
Regularly sched- Before checking, switch off the input voltage and wait until the device's capacitors have
uled inspection: discharged.

Maintenance 10
DANGER!
Therefore:
m Switch off voltage before performing work!
m Only qualified personnel may mount, install and maintain the devices.
m Please remove all metallic objects worn, such as watches or rings, for example,
before beginning to work on the device.
m Only insulated tools are permitted.
DANGER!
Therefore:

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
10.3 Inspection intervals - maintenance notes
10.3.1 Periodic maintenance
m Environmental condition
Check points Methods and criteria Inspection intervals
Daily Semi- Annu-
annu- ally
ally
Check environmental temperature, humidity and Visual inspection and measurement of the environmen- O
vibrations. tal conditions, comparison with standard values.
Check whether dust, oil or drops of water appear.
Check whether there are hazardous objects in the Visual inspection O
vicinity.
m Voltage
Daily Semi- Annu-
annu- ally
ally
Check the voltage of the power supply system and Measurement and comparison with standard values. O
the control circuits
m Mechanical parts
Daily Semi- Annu-
annu- ally
ally
Are there any abnormal noises or vibrations? Visual and audio check O
Are there any loose screws? Tighten the screws. O
Are there any bent or damaged parts? Visual inspection O
Have there been any color changes due to over- Visual inspection O
heating?
Are there any dust or dirt deposits? Visual inspection O
m Power supply
Daily Semi- Annu-
annu- ally
ally
Are there any missing or loose screws? Replace the screws or, respectively, tighten them. O
Is there any deformation, cracking, damage or Visual inspection O
color change on the device as a result of overheat-
ing or aging?
Are there any dust or dirt deposits? Visual inspection O

Maintenance 10
m Connections and circuitry of the mains power supply
Daily Semi- Annu-
annu- ally
ally
Does the wiring indicate any color or shape Visual inspection O
changes due to overheating?
Is the wiring insulation damaged or is it discol- Visual inspection O
ored?
Is there any damage? Visual inspection O
m Transformer and chokes in the main circuit

Daily Semi- Annu-
annu- ally
ally
Are there any abnormal vibrations or noticeable Visual inspection, audio check and odor check O
odors?
m Solenoid switch and relay in the power supply circuit

Daily Semi- Annu-
annu- ally
ally
Are there any loose screws? Visual and audio check Tighten screws, if necessary. O
Do the switches function correctly? Visual inspection O
m Plug connectors in the power supply circuit

Daily Semi- Annu-
annu- ally
ally
Are there any loose screws or connectors? Tighten screws and firmly stick in plug connector. O
Are there any noticeable odors or color Visual inspection and odor check O
changes?
Is there any cracking, damage, deformation or Visual inspection O
corrosion?
Is there any leaking fluid or deformation of the Visual inspection O
capacitors?

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
10.4 Repairs
m Cooling system fans

Daily Semi- Annu-
annu- ally
ally
Are there any abnormal noises or vibrations? Visual and audio check O
Are there any loose screws? Tighten the screws. O
m Cooling system ventilation duct

Daily Semi- Annu-
annu- ally
ally
Are there any obstructions in the heat sink, air Visual inspection O
supply or air outlet?
10.4 Repairs
In case of device damage, please inform your sales office or:
Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH

Ostendstr. 80 - 90 
90482 Nuremberg
Germany
Tel. +49 9 11 54 32 - 0
Fax: +49 9 11 54 32 - 1 30
Mail: mail@baumueller.de
Internet: www.baumueller.de

11 ACCESSORIES AND SPARE PARTS
Accessories/spare parts for devices of the b maXX series are listed in this appendix.
Product management is happy to handle any queries and suggestions on accessory
parts.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.1 Cabling
11.1 Cabling
11.1.1 Cables power supply - device
Device Number of wires x Connection to device 3) Maximum length 2)

cross section 1)
BM441X 4 x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 flexible cable power supply to mains filter:
(AWG 16 - 12) with/without wire end ferrule user-defined
(plug-in terminal) mains filter to power choke/
device: max. 30 cm
BM442X 4 x 0.5 to 4 mm2 flexible cable with wire end ferrule
(AWG 24 - 10) (screw terminal)
BM4432 4 x 0.5 to 10 mm2 flexible cable with wire end ferrule
BM4433 (AWG 20 - 6) (screw terminal)
BM4434
BM44354) 4 x 16 mm2 pin-cable-lugs according to DIN
63 A-fuses must be provided 46230
for the cable protection and a The terminals at the BM4435 are provided for
cable with 16 mm2 cross sec- cross sections up to 10 mm2, therefore at the
tion must be used. BM4435 pin-cable-lugs according to DIN
46230 must be used.
BM4632 4 x 25 mm2 flexible cable with wire end ferrule

63 A-fuses must be provided (screw terminal)
for the cable protection and a
cable with 25 mm2 cross sec-
tion must be used.
BM444X 4 x 16 to 50 mm2 flexible cable with wire end ferrule

BM464X (AWG 6 -0) (screw terminal)
BM445X 4 x 25 to ca. 185 mm2 cable lug max. width: 25 mm
BM465X (current bar) 5)
BM475X
BM446X cable lug max. width: 35 mm
BM466X (current bar) 6)
BM476X
BM447X max. 4 cables with cable lug max. width: 25 mm or
BM477X (4 x 95 mm2) 35 mm (current bar) 7)
max. 2 cables with
(4 x 185 mm2)
1)
Possible cross section
For UL conform machines/installations you must use UL certified circuit cables.
2)
The length of the cable between mains filter and power supply is not of importance for the compliance to the EMC regulation.
3) The installing of the cables is user-defined.
4) NOTE BM4435, BM4635
The BM4435 has an input current of 53 A, the appropriate mains filter (BFN3-1-56-001) has a rated current of 53 A, too.

Accessories and Spare Parts 11
5)
Connection lugs ((current bars). Position see ZFigure 87– on page 186 
Screw maximum two cable lugs to the current bar - one on the front side, one on the reverse
side of the bar.
6) Connection lugs (current bars). Position see ZFigure 87– on page 186 
Screw maximum two cable lugs to the current bar - one on the front side, one on the
reverse side of the bar.
7)

Connection lugs (current bars). Position see ZFigure 90– on page 189

At connection cross-section 95 mm2,Cable lug width max. 25 mm:
Screw maximum two cable lugs to the current bar - one on the front side, one on
the reverse side of the bar.

At connection cross-section 185 mm2,Cable lug width max. 35 mm:
Screw two cable lugs to the current bar at maximum- one on the front side, one on
the reverse side of the bar.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.1 Cabling
11.1.2 Cables device - motor
Device Number of wires x Maximum length 2)3) Connection to device

cross section 1)
BM441X 4 x (1 to 2.5 mm2) 100 m flexible cable with/without wire
(AWG 16 - 12) end ferrule (plug-in terminal)
BM442X 4 x (2 to 4 mm2) 1.5 to 2,5 mm2: 100 m
(AWG 24 -10) from 4 mm2: 60 m
flexible cable with wire end ferrule
BM443X 4 x (4 to 16 mm2) 60 m
(screw terminal)
BM4632 (AWG 20 - 4)
BM444X 4 x (16 to 50 mm2) up to 25 mm2: 60 m
BM464X (AWG 6 - 0) from 35 mm2: 50 m
BM445X 4 x (20 to ca. 185 mm2) up to 50 mm2: 50 m cable lug max. width:
BM465X > 50 mm2: 15 m 25 mm (current bar) 4)
BM475X
BM446X cable lug max. width:
BM466X 35 mm (current bar) 5)
BM476X
BM447X max. 4 cables each with at 95 mm²: 15 m cable lug max. width: 25 mm or 35
BM477X (4 x 95 mm2) at 185 mm²: 30 m mm (current bar) 6)
max. 4 cables each with
(2 x 185 mm2)
1)
Possible cross section
Use a screened circuit Baumüller-line, optical shield coverage > 85%. Do not use single conductors.
For UL conform machines/installations you must use UL certified circuit cables.
2)
Only for Baumüller cables with this maximum length and by usage of a Baumüller mains filter you can assume, that the limit values of
the EMC product standard EN 61800-3 are complied with.
3) In case you use parallel-installed motor cables, the maximum length is to be reduced by the factor 1/n.
4)

Screw maximum two cable lugs to the current bar - one on the front side, one on the reverse
side of the bar.

5) Connection lugs (current bars). Position see ZFigure 87– on page 186 
Screw maximum two cable lugs to the current bar - one on the front side, one on the
reverse side of the bar.
6)

At a connection cross-section of 95 mm2, cable lug width max. 25 mm:
Screw maximum two cable lugs to the current bar - one on the front side, one on
the reverse side of the bar.

At a connection cross-section of 185 mm2, cable lug width max. 35 mm:
Screw two cable lugs to the current bar at maximum- one on the front side, one on
the reverse side of the bar.
11.1.3 Cable control voltage supply/signals
Cross section 1) 1.5 mm2

Maximum length 2) user-defined
Connection to device with /without wire end ferrules (plug-in terminal)
1) The installing of the cables is user-defined.
2)
The length of the cable has no influence on the compliance to the EMC regulation.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.1 Cabling
11.1.4 Interface cable RS232
A pre-assembled cable is available as a spare part, see ZCable RS232– on page 304.
m Cable: LIYCY 6x2x0.14 mm2
m D-sub connectors, 9-pin, female, cabinet plastics metalized
m D-sub connector, 9-pin, male, cabinet plastics metalized
2 Connect the cable shield with the cabinet and with the shield of the D-sub connector
Figure 105: Interface cable RS 232

11.2 Fuses
NOTE!
The fuse specification are valid for basic units, only.
A distinction is made between protecting the power supply cables and protecting the de-
vice. To fulfill CE specifications – here in particular EN 60204-1 – fuse the power supply
cables.
.
NOTE!
Approved, UL-listed safety fuses and/or circuit breakers must be used in UL-autho-
rized systems.
Cable protection Use safety fuses of the operating class gL DIN VDE 0636-201 / IEC 60269-2-1 / HD
630.2.1 54 or circuit breaker triggering characteristic K, in accordance with DIN VDE
0636-201 / IEC 60269-2-1 / HD 630.2.1 54, to protect the cable. These fuses protect
against overloads and consequential damage from defects, for example as a result of fire.
However, they cannot prevent a device from being extensively destroyed in case of a
short circuit or ground fault in the DC link.
Carry out the fusing in accordance with EN 60204-1 („Electrical Equipment of Machines“).
Dimension the cable fuse based on the cross-section of the power supply cable used, and
in accordance with the respective applicable national standards and local regulations.
The current-carrying capacity of the cables is specified in Table 5 of EN 60204-1. For your
application, the corresponding value must still be determined based on the standard itself,
i.e. taking into account the cable routing.
NOTE!
Use suitable fuses with the tripping characteristic gL or gR.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.2 Fuses
Device protection Use semiconductor fuses with the tripping characteristic aR (DIN VDE 0636-201 / IEC
60269-2-1 / HD 630.2.1 54). Connect these in series with the cable protection fuses. In
the event of a short circuit, these protect the line-side rectifier unit circuit on the input side
against complete destruction, in order that it is possible to repair the device.
Dimension suitable device protection fuses depending on peak current and the maximum
load integral i2toff.
Device Maximum load integral 1)

BM4412 310 A2s
BM4413 310 A2s
BM4414 325 A2s
BM4422 400 A2s
BM4423 450 A2s
BM4424 800 A2s
BM4425 800 A2s
BM4426 800 A2s
BM443X (generation 1) 1.500 A2s
BM443X (generation 2, 9.500 A2s
see ZExplanation version code– on page 130)
BM463X
BM444X b 16 200 A2s
BM464X
BM445X 97 000 A2s
BM465X
BM475X
BM446X 245 000 A2s
BM466X
BM476X
BM447X 1 051 000 A2s
BM477X
1)
Use fuses that fall below the specified cutoff integral (i2taus) in the operating point.

Cable protection + There are two alternatives for protecting cable and devices:
device protection m Connecting cable protection fuses and semiconductor fuses in series
m Using full-range fuses with the tripping characteristic gR (DIN VDE 0636-201 / IEC
60269-2-1 / HD 630.2.1 54).
Dimension the suitable cable and devices protection fuses based on the cross-section of
the power supply cable used, the peak current and the maximum load integral i2toff.
In contrast to safety fuses, the device and cables may also be fused with the listed circuit
breakers according to UL (DIVQ).
Only circuit breakers without trip delay are approved. Circuit breakers with only a thermal
tripping characteristic are not tested and thus not approved. A particular point to consider
is that, in case of an error, the device is not protected against destruction; instead, only
the system is protected against the risk of fire.
The suitability of circuit breakers depends on the cross-section of the power supply cable
used and the dimensioning of the rated and peak current of the devices.
11.2.1 Fuses BM441X
m Full-range fuses gR (device and cable) 

BM4412, BM4413, design type NH
Bussmann 000 16A/690V: 170M1559 u 20A/690V: 170M1560 u
25A/690V: 170M1561 u
SIBA 000 16A/690V: 2047734/16A U
00 20A/690V: 2047720/20A 25A/690V: 2047720/25A
0 16A/1000V: 2038404/16A 20A/1000V: 2038404/20A
25A/1000V: 2038404/25A 32A/1000V: 2038404/32A
Siemens 000 16A/690V: 3NE1 813-0 U
00 25A/690V: 3NE8 015-1 U 20A/690V: 3NE8 714-1
25A/690V: 3NE8 715-1
0 32A/1000V: 3NE4 101
Size

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.2 Fuses
m Semiconductor fuses aR (device) 

BM4412, BM4413, design type NH
Bussmann 00 20A/1000V: 170M2673 25A/1000V: 170M2674
1 40A/690V: 170M3808
Ferraz Shawmut 000 16A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 016 20A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 020
25A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 025
00 20A/690V: 6,9 URD 00 PV 020 25A/690V: 6,9 URD 00 PV 025
32A/690V: 6,9 URD 00 PV 032
0 32A/690V: 6,9 URD 0 PV 032 40A/690V: 6,9 URD 0 PV 040
Size

BM4414, design type NH
Bussmann 000 25A/690V: 170M1561 32A/690V: 170M1562
Ferraz Shawmut 000 16A/690V: 6,9 GGR 000 PV 016 20A/690V: 6,9 GGR 000 PV 020
00 16A/690V: 6,9 GGR 00 PV 016
SIBA 000 16A/690V: 2047734/16A 20A/690V: 2047734/20A
00 35A/690V: 2047720/35A
0 16A/1000V: 2038404/16A 25A/1000V: 2038404/25A
32A/1000V: 2038404/32A 40A/1000V: 2038404/40A
Siemens 000 16A/690V: 3NE1 813-0 U 20A/690V: 3NE1 814-0 U
00 25A/690V: 3NE8 015-1 U 35A/690V: 3NE8 003-1 U
25A/690V: 3NE8 715-1 U 32A/690V: 3NE8 701-1 U
0 32A/1000V: 4NE4 101 40A/1000V: 4NE4 102
Size

Bussmann 00 20A/1000V: 170M2673 25A/1000V: 170M2674
32A/1000V: 170M2675 35A/1000V: 170M2676
1 40A/690V: 170M3808
32A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 032 40A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 040
00 25A/690V: 6,9 URD 00 PV 025 32A/690V: 6,9 URD 00 PV 032
40A/690V: 6,9 URD 00 PV 040
0 32A/690V: 6,9 URD 0 PV 032 40A/690V: 6,9 URD 0 PV 040
Size
11.2.2 Fuses BM442X

25A/660V: 170M1561 u 32A/660V: 170M1562 u
00 16A/690V: 170M2692 20A/690V: 170M2693
25A/690V: 170M2694 32A/690V: 170M2695
SIBA 000 16A/690V: 2047734/16A U
00 20A/690V: 2047720/20A 25A/690V: 2047720/25A
Siemens 00 16A/690V: 3NE1 813-0 U 20A/660V: 3NE8 714
25A/660V: 3NE8 715 25A/660V: 3NE8 015
32A/660V: 3NE8 701
0 32A/1000V: 3NE4 101 U
Size

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.2 Fuses

Bussmann 00 20A/1000V: 170M2673 25A/1000V: 170M2674
32A/1000V: 170M2675
1 40A/660V: 170M3808
25A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 025 32A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 032
Size

32A/660V: 170M1562 u
00 20A/690V: 170M2693 25A/690V: 170M2694
32A/690V: 170M2695
Ferraz Shawmut 000 20A/690V: 6,9 GGR 000 PV 020
00 20A/690V: 6,9 GGR 00 PV 020
SIBA 000 20A/690V: 2047734/20A U
00 20A/690V: 2047720/20A 25A/690V: 2047720/25A
Siemens 00 20A/660V: 3NE8 714 20A/690V: 3NE1 814-0 U
25A/660V: 3NE8 715 25A/660V: 3NE8 015
32A/660V: 3NE8 701
0 32A/1000V: 3NE4 101 U
Size
m Semiconductor fuses aR (device) BM4423, design type NH
Bussmann 00 20A/1000V: 170M2673 25A/1000V: 170M2674
32A/1000V: 170M2675
1 40A/660V: 170M3808
32A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 032 40A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 040
Size

m Full-range fuses gR (device and cable)
BM4424, BM4425 and BM4426, design type NH
00 25A/690V: 170M2694 32A/690V: 170M2695
00 25A/690V: 6,9 GGR 00 PV 025
SIBA 000 25A/690V: 2047734/25A U
00 25A/690V: 2047720/25A
Siemens 00 25A/660V: 3NE8 715 25A/660V: 3NE8 015
25A/690V: 3NE1 815-0 U 32A/660V: 3NE8 701
0 32A/1000V: 3NE4 101 U
Size

BM4424, BM4425 and BM4426, design type NH
Bussmann 00 25A/1000V: 170M2674 32A/1000V: 170M2675
40A/1000V: 170M2676
1 40A/660V: 170M3808 50A/660V: 170M3809
63A/660V: 170M3810
40A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 040 50A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 050
Siemens 00 40A/660V: 3NE8 702
Size

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.2 Fuses
11.2.3 Fuses BM4X3X
NOTE!
Please note, that the fuses must be adapted, if a BM443X generation 1 is replaced
by a BM443X generation 2 (ZExplanation version code– on page 130).
Operation of BM443X generation 1 and generation 2 in combination see ZMix mode
BM443X generation 1 and 2– on page 124.
Semiconductor fuses aR (device) BM443X generation 2 see next page.

BM443X generation 1, design type NH
00 50A/690V: 170M2697 63A/690V: 170M2698
1 50A/690V: 170M4176 63A/690V: 170M4177
SIBA 00 63A/690V: 2047720/63A
1 63A/690V: 2021120/63A
Siemens 00 63A/660V: 3NE8 018-1 U
0 50A/1000V: 3NE4 117
Size
m Semiconductor fuses aR 
(device) BM443X generation 1, design type NH
Bussmann 00 50A/1000V: 170M2678 63A/1000V: 170M2679
1 63A/690V: 170M3810 80A/690V: 170M3811
SIBA 0 63A/1000V: 2038404/63A 80A/1000V: 2038404/80A
0 63A/1000V: 3NE4 118 U
Size

BM443X generation 2 and BM4632, design type NH
SIBA 1 80A/690V: 2021134.80 U
Siemens 000 80A/690V: 3NE1820-0 U
00 100A/690V: 3NE1021-2 U
Size
m Semiconductor fuses aR (device) BM443X generation 2 and BM4632, design type NH
Bussmann 000 125A/690V: 170M1568D U
SIBA 000/80 125A/690V: 2028220.125 U
Siemens 0 100A/1000V: 3NE4 121 U
00 100A/690V: 3NE8021-1 U 125A/690V: 3NE8022-1 U
000/80 125A/690V: 3NE8 722-1 U
1/110 125A/1000V: 3NE3 222 U
Size
11.2.4 Fuses BM4X4X
m Full-range fuses gR, gRL, gR/gS, gGR (device and cable) 

BM444X, design type NH
Bussmann 00 80A/690V: 170M2699 100A/690V: 170M2700
125A/690V: 170M2701 1)
1 80A/690V: 170M4178 100A/690V: 170M4179
125A/690V: 170M4180 160A/690V: 170M4181
Ferraz Shawmut 000 80A/690V: 6,9 GGR 000 PV 080/6,9

GGR 000 D08L 080
00 80A/690V: 6,9 GGR 00 PV 080/6,9

GGR 00 D08L 080
SIBA 1 80A/690V: 2021120-80A 100A/690V: 2021120-100A
80A/690V: 2021134-80A U 100A/690V: 2021134-100A U1)
Siemens 000 80A/690V: 3NE1 820-0 U
Size
1)
For the connection of an additional DC link capacitance or the parallel operation of up to five devices suitable,
that means the DC link of several devices is connected with at the same time existent power supply connec-
tion of every device.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.2 Fuses

Bussmann 000 80A/690V: 170M1566 U 100A/690V: 170M1567 U
125A/690V: 170M1568 U 160A/690V: 170M1569 U
00 80A/1000V: 170M2680 100A/1000V: 170M2681
125A/1000V: 170M2682
1 80A/690V: 170M3811 U 100A/690V: 170M3812 U
125A/690V: 170M3813 U 160A/690V: 170M3814 U1)
SIBA 1 125A/690V: 2021120/125A 1)
Siemens 000 80A/690V: 3NE8 720-1 U 100A/690V: 3NE8 721-1 U
125A/690V: 3NE8 722-1 U 160A/690V: 3NE8 724-1 U
00 80A/690V: 3NE8 020-1 U 100A/690V: 3NE8 021-1 U
125A/690V: 3NE8 022-1 U 160A/690V: 3NE8 024-1 U
0 80A/1000V: 3NE4 120 U 100A/1000V: 3NE4 121 U
125A/1000V: 3NE4 122 U
1 100A/1000V: 3NE3 221 U 125A/1000V: 3NE3 222 U
160A/1000V: 3NE3 224 U
Size
1)

SIBA 1 100A/690V: 2021134.100 U
Siemens 00 125A/690V: 3NE1022-2 U
Size

Bussmann 000 200A/690V: 170M1570D U
Ferraz Shawmut 00 160A/690V: NH00GS69V16PV
SIBA 00C/80 160A/690V: 2028220.160 U
Siemens 00 125A/690V: 3NE8022-1 U
Size

Siemens 00 125A/690V: 3NE1022-2 U
Size

Bussmann 000 200A/690V: 170M1570D U
SIBA 00C/80 200A/690V: 2028220.200 U
1 250A/690V: 2021120.250 U
Siemens 00 160A/690V: 3NE8024-1 U
Size

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.2 Fuses
11.2.5 Fuses BM4X5X

Bussmann 00 100A/690V: 170M2700 125A/690V: 170M2701
160A/690V: 170M2702
1 125A/690V: 170M4180 160A/690V: 170M4181
200A/690V: 170M4182 1) 250A/690V: 170M4183 1)
2 200A/690V: 170M5881 250A/690V: 170M5882 1)
315A/690V: 170M5883 1)
3 350A/690V: 170M6080 1)
00 100A/690V: 6,9 GGR 00 PV 100
125A/690V: 6,9 GGR 00 PV 125 1)
160A/690V: 6,9 GGR 00 PV 160 1)
SIBA 00 100A/690V: 2020934/100AU 125A/690V: 2020934/125AU1)
1 100A/690V: 2021134/100AU 125A/690V: 2021134/125AU1)
160A/690V: 2021134/160AU1) 200A/690V: 2021134/200AU1)
2 160A/690V: 2021234/160AU1) 200A/690V: 2021234/200AU1)
Siemens 00 100A/690V: 3NE1 021-0 U 125A/690V: 3NE1 022-0 U1)
1 160A/690V: 3NE1 224-0 U1) 200A/690V: 3NE1 225-0 U1)
Size
1) For the connection of an additional DC link capacitance or the parallel operation of up to five devices suitable,

200A/660V: 170M1570 u 250A/660V: 170M1571 u1)
315A/660V: 170M1572 u1)
00 125A/1000V: 170M2682 160A/1000V: 170M2683 1)
200A/900V: 170M2684 1) 225A/900V: 170M2685 1)
1 160A/660V: 170M3814 200A/660V: 170M3815
250A/660V: 170M3816 315A/660V: 170M3817 1)
350A/660V: 170M3818 1) 400A/660V: 170M3819 1)
2 400A/660V: 170M5808 1) 450A/660V: 170M5809 1)
3 500A/660V: 170M6808 1)
Ferraz Shawmut 000 125A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 0125
160A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 0160
200A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 0200
250A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 0250 1)
315A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 0315 1)
Siemens 00 125A/660V: 3NE8 022 U 125A/660V: 3NE8 722
160A/660V: 3NE8 024 160A/660V: 3NE8 724
200A/660V: 3NE8 725 250A/660V: 3NE8 727 1)
315A/660V: 3NE8 731 1)
0 100A/1000V: 3NE4 121 U 125A/1000V: 3NE4 122 U
160A/1000V: 3NE4 124 U
1 125A/1000V: 3NE3 222 U 160A/1000V: 3NE3 224 U
200A/1000V: 3NE3 225 U 250A/1000V: 3NE3 227 U1)
315A/1000V: 3NE3 230-0BU1) 350A/1000V: 3NE3 231 U1)
400A/1000V: 3NE3 232-0BU1)
2 400A/1000V: 3NE3 332-0BU1)
Size
1)

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.2 Fuses

SIBA 1 160A/690V: 2021134.160 U
Siemens 1 200A/690V: 3NE1225-2 U
Size

Bussmann 00 315A/690V: 170M1572D U
SIBA 00C/80 315A/690V: 2028220.315 U
Siemens 1/110 200A/1000V: 3NE3225 U
Size

SIBA 1 200A/690V: 2021134.200 U
Siemens 1 250A/690V: 3NE1227-2 U
Size

Bussmann 00 315A/690V: 170M1572D U
SIBA 00C/80 350A/690V: 2018920.350 U
Siemens 1/110 250A/1000V: 3NE3227 U
Size

Siemens 1 250A/690V: 3NE1227-2 U
Size

Bussmann 00 315A/690V: 170M1572D U
SIBA 1 315A/690V: 2021120.315 U
00C/80 400A/690V: 2018920.400 U
Siemens 1/110 315A/1000V: 3NE3230-0B U 450A/1000V: 3NE3233 U
Size

NOTE!
The semiconductor fuses can be used for the device BM4755 provided that:
m The total DC link capacitance of all connected devices is lower than 20 mF
m The used mains filter and power choke fulfill the Baumüller specifications.
Bussmann 1 350A/660V: 170M3818 U
2 400A/660V: 170M5808 U 450A/660V: 170M5809 U
3 500A/660V: 170M6808 U
SIBA 00 350A/690V: 2018920.350 U
Siemens 00 315A/1000V: 3NE8731-1 U
1 315A/1000V: 3NE3230-0B U 350A/1000V: 3NE3231 U
Size

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.2 Fuses
11.2.6 Fuses BM4X6X

Bussmann 1 250A/690V: 170M4183 315A/690V: 170M4184 1)
350A/690V: 170M4185 1) 400A/690V: 170M4186 1)
2 250A/690V: 170M5882 315A/690V: 170M5883 1)
350A/690V: 170M5884 1) 400A/690V: 170M5885 1)
450A/690V: 170M58861)
3 350A/690V: 170M6080 1) 400A/690V: 170M6081 1)
450A/690V: 170M6082 1)
SIBA 1 250A/690V: 2021134/250AU1) 315A/690V: 2021134/315AU1)
2 250A/690V: 2021234/250AU1) 315A/690V: 2021234/315AU1)
350A/690V: 2021234/350AU1)
3 315A/690V: 2021334/315A1) 350A/690V: 2021334/350A1)
Siemens 1 250A/690V: 3NE1 227-0 U1) 315A/690V: 3NE1 230-0 U1)
Size
1)
m Semiconductor fuses aR (device) BM446X, design type NH
00 225A/900V: 170M2685 1)
1 250A/660V: 170M3816 315A/660V: 170M3817
350A/660V: 170M3818 400A/660V: 170M3819 1)
2 400A/660V: 170M5808 450A/660V: 170M5809 1)
500A/660V: 170M5810 1) 550A/660V: 170M58111)
630A/660V: 170M58121)
3 500A/660V: 170M6808 550A/660V: 170M6809 1)
630A/660V: 170M6810 1) 700A/660V: 170M6811 1)
Size

Ferraz Shawmut 000 250A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 0250
315A/690V: 6,9 URD 000 PV 0315
00 250A/690V: 6,9 URD 00 PV 0250 315A/690V: 6,9 URD 00 PV 0315
0 250A/690V: 6,9 URD 0 PV 0250 315A/690V: 6,9 URD 0 PV 0315
1 250A/690V: 6,9 URD 1 PV 0250 315A/690V: 6,9 URD 1 PV 0315
350A/690V: 6,9 URD 1 PV 0350 400A/690V: 6,9 URD 1 PV 0400 1)
2 250A/690V: 6,9 URD 2 PV 0250 315A/690V: 6,9 URD 2 PV 0315
350A/690V: 6,9 URD 2 PV 0350 400A/690V: 6,9 URD 2 PV 0400
450A/690V: 6,9 URD 2 PV 0450 1) 500A/690V: 6,9 URD 2 PV 0500 1)
560A/690V: 6,9 URD 2 PV 0560 1) 630A/690V: 6,9 URD 2 PV 0630 1)
3 315A/690V: 6,9 URD 3 PV 0315 350A/690V: 6,9 URD 3 PV 0350
400A/690V: 6,9 URD 3 PV 0400 450A/690V: 6,9 URD 3 PV 0450
500A/690V: 6,9 URD 3 PV 0500 1) 560A/690V: 6,9 URD 3 PV 0560 1)
630A/690V: 6,9 URD 3 PV 0630 1) 700A/690V: 6,9 URD 3 PV 0700 1)
1 250A/1000V: 3NE3 227 U 315A/1000V: 3NE3 230-0B U
350A/1000V: 3NE3 231 U1) 400A/1000V: 3NE3 232-0BU1)
450A/1000V: 3NE3 233 U1)
2 400A/1000V: 3NE3 332-0BU1) 450A/1000V: 3NE3 333 U1)
500A/1000V: 3NE3 334-0BU1) 560A/1000V: 3NE3 335 U1)
Size
1)

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.2 Fuses

SIBA 1 315A/690V: 2021134.315 U
Siemens 1 315A/690V: 3NE1230-2 U
Size

Bussmann 1 500A/690V: 170M4864D U
550A/690V: 170M5811D U
SIBA 1/110 500A/690V: 2061331.500 U
Siemens 1/110 400A/1000V: 3NE3232-0B U
Size

SIBA 1 315A/690V: 2021134.315 U
2 350A/690V: 2021134.350 U
Siemens 2 400A/690V: 3NE1332-2 U 500A/690V: 3NE1334-2 U
Size

Bussmann 2 550A/690V: 170M5811D U
SIBA 1/110 630A/690V: 2061331.630 U
Siemens 1/110 450A/1000V: 3NE3233 U
2/110 560A/1000V: 3NE3335 U
Size

HINWEIS!
The semiconductor fuses can be used for the device BM4766 provided that:
m The total DC link capacitance of all connected devices is lower than 20 mF
m The used mains filter and power choke fulfill the Baumüller specifications.
Bussmann 2 500A/660V: 170M5810 U
3 550A/660V: 170M6809 U
Ferraz Shawmut 2 500A/690V: 6,9URD2PV0500
3 560A/690V: 6,9URD2PV0560
SIBA 1 / 110 mm 500A/690V: 2061331.500 U
Siemens 1 / 110 mm 450A/1000V: 3NE3233 U
2 450A/1000V: 3NE3333 U
Size

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.2 Fuses
11.2.7 Fuses BM447X
DANGER!
Danger to life from electric current!
Parts, which are under tension are perilous. Damage in isolation or damage of single
parts can be can be highly dangerous.
Therefore:
The use of semiconductor fuses is obligatory at the power supply connection of
BM447X devices. Semiconductor fuses are required in the connection between
brake resistor and device except the user assures the short-circuit protection of re-
sistor and cable.

BM4472:
Siemens 2 500A/1000V: 3NE3 334-0B u 560A/1000V: 3NE3 335 u
710A/900V: 3NE3 337-8 u
Size
NOTE
The 710 A fuse is recommended if the BM4472 is operated constantly at rated power
and/or peak power is required frequently, because the 710 A fuse provides higher
thermal reserve compared with 500A/560A fuses and therefore the risk of fuse trip-
ping at normal run (without real error) is reduced.
BM4473, BM4773:
Siemens 2 800A/800V: 3NE3 338-8 u
Size

11.2.8 UL fuse in the ballast circuit
BM445X, BM465X and BM4755:
Siemens 160A/700V: 3NE8 724-1 u
BM446X, BM466X and BM4766:
Siemens 250A/700V: 3NE8 727-1 u
BM447X, BM477X
Siemens 1 350A/1000V: 3NE3 231 u
Size
11.2.9 24V extra-low voltage protection
In case you refer to UL 508 C:

Assure, that all marked e. l. v. connections (24 V) at the device have a maximum voltage
of 30 VDC. Additionally these connections must be protected with fuses which are in ac-
cordance with UL 248 with a triggering current of maximum 4 A.
HINWEIS!
If the current consumption is lower than 4 A, several connections can be protected
together with a UL-listed fuse (release current max. 4 A).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.3 Mains filters
11.3 Mains filters
Line filters are combinations of capacitors, chokes, resistors and voltage limiters, which
reduce the electromagnetic influence of environment. Further information see Instruction
handbook Mains Filter BFN, 5.09010.
11.3.1 Block diagram of filter for mains applications (simplified)
11.3.2 Baumüller mains filter type code
Figure 106: Mains filter type code
11.3.3 Required mains filter environmental conditions
Transport temperature range -25 °C to +85 °C

Storage temperature range - 25 °C to +85 °C
Operating environment Outside of residential areas
Operating temperature range -25 °C to +85 °C (rated temperature 50 °C)

11.3.4 Electrical data mains filter
TN/TT systems
BFN 3-1-... -001 0007 0016 0030 0042 0056 0075 0100 0130 0180
Max. input supply voltage 3 x 480 VAC +10 %,
50/60 Hz
Rated current  7A 16 A 30 A 42 A 56 A 75 A 100 A 130 A 180 A
(at TB = 50 °C)
Peak current  1.5 x IN for < 1 min per hour
(at TB = 50 °C)
Current derating
 ambient
I = I rated  85 – --------------------
35°C
Test voltage line - line: 2125 VDC / 2 s

line - housing: 2125 VDC / 2 s
Connection L1/L2/L3: safe-to-touch screw terminals
PE connection: bolt M5 / M6 / M10
Maximum connection  4 4 10 10 16 25 50 50 50
cross-section mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
Power loss (typical) 4W 8W 12 W 15 W 18 W 24 W 24 W 30 W 35 W
Protection class IP 20
EPCOS B84143A0150R410
Max. input supply voltage 3 x 480 VAC +10 %,
50/60 Hz
Rated current  150 A
(at TB = 50 °C)
(at TB = 50 °C) 2.5 x IN for < 1 min per hour
Connection L1/L2/L3: safe-to-touch screw terminals
PE: bolt M10
Maximum connection  95 mm2
cross-section

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.3 Mains filters
BFN 3-1-... -001 0250 0320 0400 0600

Max. input supply voltage 3 x 480 VAC +10 %, 50/60 Hz
Rated current  250 A 320 A 400 A 600 A
(at TB = 50 °C)
Peak current  4 x IN when switching on
(at TB = 50 °C) 1.5 x IN for < 1 min / once per hour
Connection bolt M10 bar with hole 11mm
PE: bolt M12
Power loss (typical) 60 W 40 W 50 W 65 W
BFN 3-1-... -101 0320 0400 0600 1000

(at TB = 50 °C)
(at TB = 50 °C) or
2.5 x IN for 30 s per hour
Connection bar with hole 11mm bar with hole
PE: bolt M10  14mm
PE: bolt M12
Power loss (typical) 31 W 48 W 84 W

Filter for 
IT systems
BFN 3-1-... -002 150 0250 0320 0400 0600

Rated current  150 A 250 A 320 A 400 A 600 A
(at TB = 50 °C)
Peak current  4 x IN when switching on
(at TB = 50 °C) 1.5 x IN for < 1 min / once per hour
Connection bolt M10 bar with hole bar with hole bar with hole
 11mm  11mm  11mm
PE: bolt M12 PE: bolt M12 PE: bolt M12
Power loss (typical) 30 W 60 W 40 W 50 W 65 W
BFN 3-1-... -102 0320 0400 0600 1000

(at TB = 50 °C)
(at TB = 50 °C) or
2.5 x IN for 30 s per hour
Connection bar with hole 11mm bar with hole
PE: bolt M10  14mm
PE: bolt M12
Power loss (typical) 31 W 48 W 84 W
DANGER!
Risk of fatal injury due to high leakage current!
Therefore:
m The cross-section of the protective ground conductor must be at least 10 mm2
(EN 61800-5-1, Chapter 4.3.5.5.2).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.3 Mains filters
11.3.5 Mains filter selection
NOTE!
The rated current of the filters that are used must be larger than or have same RMS-
value as the actual power suppl.y current (actual power supply current = RMS-value
of the power supply current during the entire cycle time of the drive). During short-
time operation (S3), the RMS-value is calculated as follows:
T
1
I rms = ---  i 2 dt
T
0
TT/TN system
Irated AC 1) Typ Part No.

7 A BFN-3-1 - 0007 - 001 314277
16 A BFN-3-1 - 0016 - 001 314278
30 A BFN-3-1 - 0030 - 001 314279
42 A BFN-3-1 - 0042 - 001 314280
56 A BFN-3-1 - 0056 - 001 314281
75 A BFN-3-1 - 0075 - 001 314282
100 A BFN-3-1 - 0100 - 001 314283
130 A BFN-3-1 - 0130 - 001 314284
150 A EPCOS B84143A0150R410 437618
180 A BFN-3-1 - 0180 - 001 314285
250 A BFN-3-1 - 0250 - 001 373891
320 A BFN-3-1 - 0320 - 001 439384
BFN-3-1 - 0320 - 101 373896
400 A BFN-3-1 - 0400 - 101 373900
600 A BFN-3-1 - 0600 - 001 373901
BFN-3-1 - 0600 - 101 419997
1000 A BFN-3-1 - 1000 - 101 423683
1) Rated temperature = 50° C

IT system
Irated AC 1) Typ Part No.

150 A BFN-3-1 - 0150 - 002 433177
250 A BFN-3-1 - 250 - 002 373620
320 A BFN-3-1 - 320 - 002 373894
BFN-3-1 - 320 - 102 439387
400 A BFN-3-1 - 400 - 002 373898
600 A BFN-3-1 - 600 - 002 373902
BFN-3-1 - 600 - 102 439388
1)
Rated temperature = 50° C

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.4 Power chokes
11.4 Power chokes
NOTE!
No power chokes are necessary for the devices BM441X, BM4422, BM4423,
BM4424 and BM4425.
UL certified power chokes must be used in UL compliant machines/systems.
Current Select the power chokes dependent upon your application and based on the input rated
current. Take into account that the max. input current of the chokes may not lead to sat-
uration.
Inductance Select the power chokes depending on the short-circuit voltage of the power supply, so
that the required inductance of the power supply see ZRequirements to the energy supply
/ supply system– on page 52 is adhered to.
NOTE
There is a different short-circuit voltage with the same choke at 60 Hz than there is at
50 Hz; according to the formula uk = (LIN3) / UN (with  = 2f) the short-circuit
voltage that would result at another power supply frequency can be calculated.
NOTE
The rated inductance is constant up to 1.1 times of rated current. You can expect that
the inductance is reduced, if the current flow through the commutation choke is higher
than this value. If it is important for the application, that the commutation inductance
is equal its rated value when for longer time (e. g. with 30 s or 60 s) peak current at
peak power is needed, chose a commutation choke with a peak current smaller or
equal of the 1.1 times of the rated value of the commutation choke.
If you have any doubt selecting a commutation choke for a specific application,
please contact the responsible sales representative of Baumüller.
NOTE
At installation heights higher than 1000 m above MSL the current must be reduced
for 10 % per 1000 m.
At operation temperatures from 40 °C up to 55 °C the current must be reduced for
1 % per °C

Power choke 
type code
B K X - XXXX / XXX - XXX
Baumüller Development status/design

001: Connection copper bar, overload factor 1,1
002: Connection terminal, overload factor 1,1
101: Connection copper bar, overload factor 2
102: Connection terminal, overload factor 2
Commutation choke
No. of phases DC set value

- Single phase choke: 1,0 x Ieff
1: Single phase choke
3: Three phase choke - Three phase choke: 1,22 x Ieff
Rated AC current Ieff
Figure 107: Type code power choke
The listed chokes are specified for the operation at 400 V /50 Hz or 480 V / 60 Hz.
At a power supply voltage of 400 V and a frequency of 50 Hz at rated current the chokes
have a short-circuit voltage > 3% of the power supply voltage.
UL approval
The chokes are design-tested in accordance with UL (e.g. UL1561) and signified by the
ú“ symbol.
Irated AC Induc- Type code Part No. Part No. For devices
tance
type -101, type -102,
connection connection
copper bar terminal
24 A 1,22 mH BK3-0024/0029 - 456715 BM4426
53 A 0,55 mH BK3-0053/0070 - 456717 BM4632
82 A 0,36 mH BK3-0082/0100 - 456718 BM4641
95 A 0,31 mH BK3-0095/0116 - 456720 BM4642
125 A 0,23 mH BK3-0125/0153 - 456722 BM4650
160 A 0,18 mH BK3-0160/0196 - 456723 BM4651
190 A 0,15 mH BK3-0190/0232 456725 - BM4652
240 A 0,12 mH BK3-0240/0294 456728 - BM4661
285 A 0,10 mH BK3-0285/0350 456729 - BM4662

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.4 Power chokes
Irated AC Induc- Type code Part No. Part No. For devices For devices
tance
type -001, type -002,
connection connection operation with operation with
copper bar terminal peak current rated current
25 A 1.18 mH BK3-0025/0030 368377 399136 - BM4432, BM4433

40 A 0.72 mH BK3-0040/0050 368378 399137 BM4432, BM4433 BM4434
65 A 0.45 mH BK3-0065/0080 368379 399138 BM4434, BM4435 BM4435
80 A 0.36 mH BK3-0080/0100 368380 399139 - BM4443
115 A 0.26 mH BK3-0115/0140 368381 399140 BM4443, BM4444, BM4445,
BM4444 BM4452
165 A 0.18 mH BK3-0165/0200 368382 399141 BM4445, BM4452 BM4446, BM4453
195 A 0.15 mH BK3-0195/0240 368383 - BM4446, BM4453 BM4755
275 A 105 µH BK3-0275/0340 368384 - BM4454 BM4454, BM4462
365 A 80 µH BK3-0365/0450 368385 - BM4462, BM4463, BM4463, BM4466,
BM4755 BM4766
450 A 65 µH BK3-0450/0550 368386 - BM4466, BM4766 -
530 A 55 µH BK3-0530/0650 368387 - - BM4472
615 A 48 µH BK3-0615/0750 368388 - BM4472 -
750 A 39 µH BK3-0750/0920 368389 - - BM4473, BM4773
920 A 32.6 µH BK3-0900/1100 368390 - BM4473, BM4773 -
1020 A 28 µH BK3-1020/1250 395020 - - -
Figure 108: Figure power choke

BK3- Part IAC IDC  a b c d e f  g Weight Flat connection Ø
No. [A] [A] mm mm mm mm mm mm kg mm  mm
0024/0029-102 456715 24 29 155 95 155 130 72 8x12 6 Cage clamp 4 mm²
0025/0030-001 368377 25 30 155 130 132 130 72 812 6 202 for M6
0040/0050-001 368378 41 50 190 120 158 170 58 812 7 202 for M6
0053/0070-102 456717 53 70 230 130 285 180 98 912 13 Cage clamp 10 mm²
0065/0080-001 368379 66 80 190 140 158 170 78 812 10 202 for M6
0080/0100-001 368380 82 100 230 165 202 180 98 812 12 253 for M8
0082/0100-102 456718 82 100 230 175 225 180 122 912 20 20x3 for M8
0095/0116-102 456720 95 116 240 180 225 190 125 1115 25 20x3 for M8
0115/0140-001 368381 115 140 230 190 202 180 122 812 18 253 for M10
0125/0153-102 456722 125 153 265 190 250 215 126 1115 31 254 for M10
0160/0196-102 456723 160 196 300 210 285 240 123 1125 37 254 for M10
0165/0200-001 368382 164 200 240 195 211 190 125 1115 23 253 for M10
0190/0232-101 456725 190 232 300 220 285 240 135 11x25 42 254 for M10
0195/0240-001 368383 197 240 265 195 230 215 126 1115 28 253 for M10
0240/0294-101 456728 240 294 360 225 330 310 125 1130 52 405 for M12
0275/0340-001 368384 297 340 300 225 271 240 145 11x15 38 305 for M10
0285/0350-101 456729 285 350 360 255 330 310 155 11x30 69 405 for M12
0365/0450-001 368385 369 450 360 220 320 310 125 1115 47 405 for M12
0450/0550-001 368386 451 550 360 260 320 310 140 1115 58 505 for M12
0530/0650-001 368387 533 650 360 260 320 310 140 1115 63 505 for M12
0615/0750-001 368388 615 750 420 285 375 370 151 1115 68 605 for M12
0750/0920-001 368389 754 920 420 285 375 370 151 1115 78 605 for M12
0900/1100-001 368390 902 1100 420 285 380 370 166 1115 90 6010 for M12
1020/1250-001 395020 1020 1250 420 330 380 370 181 1115 115 6010 for M12
1150/1400-001 408679 1150 1400 420 330 380 370 181 11x15 130 6010 for M12
1270/1550-001 408698 1270 1550 480 350 430 430 210 13x18 135 60x10 for M12
1350/1650-001 408699 1350 1650 480 350 430 430 210 13x18 145 60x10 for M12
1430/1750-001 408700 1430 1750 480 350 430 430 210 13x18 150 60x10 for M12
1680/2050-001 408701 1680 2050 480 350 430 430 210 13x18 170 60x10 for M12

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.5 Baumüller accessories
11.5.1 Shielding clamp
Type Part No.

Width 11 mm, for cable diameter up to 8 mm 00312171
Width 19 mm, for cable diameter 7 mm to 16 mm 00397366
11.5.2 Cable RS232
NOTE!
In case you don’t use an optically decoupled interface cable, the cable shield has only
to be connected to the connector housing at the controller connector.
The company Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH recommends the usage of optically decou-
pled transmitters (e.g. from the company Ratioplast part no. 901SV232C6095 and
part no. 901SV232T6095)
Optically decoupled interface cable
Interface Name Length Part No.

X1 (RS 232) Programming cable 3m on request
Further lengths on request.

11.5.3 Accessories Ethernet/EtherCAT®.
Available Ethernet connecting cables:

type: patch cable, STP
Type Length [m] Part No.

K-ETH-33-0-0,5 0.5 325160
K-ETH-33-0-01 1 325161
K-ETH-33-0-02 2 325162
K-ETH-33-0-03 3 325163
K-ETH-33-0-04 4 325317
K-ETH-33-0-05 5 325164
K-ETH-33-0-10 10 325165
Additional lengths upon request

Crossover package consisting of cross connector (part No. 365463) and Cat5 cable 0.5 m
(part No. 325160)
Type Part No.

K-ETH-CROSS-ADAPTER 365464
Modular connector, RJ45 female - RJ45 female, crossover, Cat5, shielded
Type Part No.

K-ETH-CROSS-KUPPLUNG 365463

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.5.4 Accessories - CANopen®.
m CANopen®-connection cables:
Type Model Length [m] Part No.

BM4-CAN-K-31-01 RJ45-plug,  1 346568
male sub D con-
BM4-CAN-K-31-02 2 on request
nector
BM4-CAN-K-31-03 3 346571
BM4-CAN-K-31-05 / 10 5 / 10 on request
BM4-CAN-K-32-01 RJ45-plug,  1 346572
sub D female
BM4-CAN-K-32-03 3 346573
BM4-CAN-K-32-05 / 10 5 on request
BM4-CAN-K-33-01 RJ45-plug,  1 346577
RJ45-plug
m Terminated plug RJ45 

(Termination plug CAN, RJ45 with pin assignment according to CIA-standard, 120 ,
0.25 W)
Type Part No.

BM4-CAN-T01 346408

11.5.5 Encoder cables
m Motor-side encoder plug
Type Part no.

Encoder plug 12-pin 245147
12-pin SpeedTec 448729
17-pin 362601
17-pin SpeedTec 448730
m Cable connector and accordingly encoder cable for resolver, sine-cosine encoder with
Hiperface® interface and square wave incremental encoder
15-pin D-sub connector/12-pin encoder plug (assembled - alternatively trailing cable,
length see selections, further lengths on request).
SpeedTec
not trailing cable trailing cable trailing cable
Length Part no. Part no. Part no.
1m 243601 - 448941
2m 211338 - 448943
3m 219333 246658 448944
4m 231166 243379 448945
5m 209879 239540 448948
6m 220197 242954 448946
7m 216455 - 448947
8m 220429 239541 448949
10 m 210052 239542 448956
15 m 215716 239543 448961
20 m 218568 239544 448967
25 m 218569 239545 448970
30 m 217094 239546 448971
35 m 216444 239547 448973
40 m 217095 240520 448976
45 m 217567 240521 448978
50 m 217568 240522 448979
55 m 217569 244033 448981
60 m 217570 245484 448982
70 m 232088 - -
Bold: preferred length

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
In case the cable is produced self, please use the instructions stated below:

m Cable: LIYCY 5 x (2 x 0.14) + 2 x 0.5 mm, Cu braiding with at least 85% opt. overlap
m Circular connector: 12-pin, female (e.g. Interconnectron)
Figure 109: Cable connectors, 12-wire
NOTE
The cable connector must be produced according to the illustration which is shown above! 
In case there is another assignment of the pins, the cable will not operate and defects as well
as at the encoder module and also at the encoder can appear!

m EnDat® 2.1 encoder cable 
15-pin D-sub connector/12-pin encoder plug (assembled - alternatively trailing cable,
length see selections, further lengths on request).
SpeedTec
not trailing cable trailing cable trailing cable
Length Part no. Part no. Part no.
2m 383152 393889 448816
3m 383923 369864 448817
5m 393885 394014 448818
7m 389445 389807 448819
8m 380138 393890 448820
9m 389446 389808 448821
10 m 393886 393891 448822
15 m 388505 393892 448823
17 m - 371494 448824
20 m 388418 393893 448825
25 m 393887 393894 448826
30 m 393888 380358 448827
35 m 387958 391216 448828
40 m 382006 382005 448830
50 m 388419 378022 -
70 m 384473 - -
90 m 387391 - -
Bold: preferred length
NOTE
With this encoder cables no evaluation of the motor temperature sensor is possible!

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Use the instructions stated below, in order to make the cable self:´´

m Cable: 14 wires (recommendation: 6 x (2 x 0.14mm2) + 2 x 0.5 mm2), twisted pairs,
pairs layer-twisted, tinned Cu transfer, Cu braiding with at least 85% opt. overlap.
m Circular connector: 17-pin, female (e. g. Interconnectron)
2 connect the cable shield laminar with the shield of the D-sub connector.
Figure 110: Cable connector for sine-cosine encoder with EnDat®-interface
NOTE
The cable connector must be produced according to the illustration which is shown
above! 
In case there is another assignment of the pins, the cable will not operate and defects
as well as at the encoder module and also at the encoder can appear!

m EnDat 2.2® encoder cable without incremental signals 
(original encoder cable of Fa. Heidenhain), lengths on request.
Cable with M12 connector 8-pin completely assembled with female connector plug and
male D-sub connector.
Item no. Fa. Heidenhain
524599-xx (xx: length)

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
11.5.6 Design cover and connectors

BM443X, BM463X
BM444X, BM464X
BM447X, BM477X
BM4413 1)
BM4413 2)
BM4414 1)
BM4414 2)
BM4412
BM4412
BM442X
Part No.
Design cover (yellow) small X - X - - - - - - - 351209
Design cover (yellow) wide - X - X X X X X X X 351210
Connector „Motor“ X X X X - - - - - - 354746
Phoenix: GIC 2,5/4-ST-7,62, 1828825
Connector „1C1/1D1“ or „1C1/1D1/Ba“ X X X X - - - - - - 354746
Phoenix: GIC 2,5/4-ST-7,62, 1828825
Connector „Ba+/Ba-“ - - X X - - - - - - 381872
Phoenix: GIC 2,5/2-ST-7,62
Connector „Power supply“ X X X X - - - - - - 309377
Phoenix: GMSTB 2,5/4-ST, 1766903
Wieland: 8313B/4 OBGN, 25.360.3453.7
Connector X3 X X X X X X X X X X 354874
Phoenix: FK-MCP 1,5/6-ST-3,81, 1851083
Connector X100 and X101 X X X X X X X X X X 354810
Wieland: 8513 BFK, 25.630.3653.0
Connector X102 3)4) - - - - - X X X X X 363845
Phoenix: FK-MCP 1,5/4-ST-3,81, 1851067
Wieland: 8513 BFK, 25.630.3453.7 X X X X X - - - - - 354809
4)
Connector X103 - - - - - X X X X X 363845
Phoenix: FK-MCP 1,5/4-ST-3,81, 1851067
1)
BM441X - XXX - 01
2)
BM441X - XXX - 02
3)
BM44XX - XX1, BM44XX - XX3
4)
BM44XX - XX2, BM44XX - XX4

12 SHUTDOWN, STORAGE
In this chapter we describe, how you decommission and store the device.
12.1 Safety instructions
h Refer to ZSafety– from page 15 and the information in ZTransport and Packaging–
from page 141.
The shutdown of the device may only be carried out by for this qualified personnel.
DANGER!
discharge time.
Therefore:
m Do not touch electrically live parts before taking into account the discharge time of
the capacitors.
m Assure, that all electric connections are current-free and are safe against switch-
on.
m Before working, check at the electrical connections with suitable measuring devic-
es, that the connections are off-circuit.
m Remove the connections not until the safe isolation from supply has been checked.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
12.2 Requirements to the executing personnel
12.2 Requirements to the executing personnel
The personnel, who is appointed to setting out of operation, must have the required
knowledge and instructions, which is necessary for an execution according to the rules.
Select the personnel in such a way, that the safety instructions, which are mounted to the
device and its parts as well as to the connections, are understood and applied to.
12.3 Shutdown
Execute the setting out of operation as follows:

1 put the device off-circuit and assure the device against unintentional restart.
2 check the isolation from supply of all connections (earliest 10 minutes after switching
off).
3 demount the connections and protect the connections according to the safety instruc-
tions.
4 document the shut down setting.
12.4 Demounting
The demounting assumes a completed, documented setting out of operation.
NOTICE!
Note sharp edges.
In case, while installing, you lift a device with unprotected hands, fingers/palm can be
cut. If the device falls off, your feet can be cut up.
Therefore:
sembly instructions, demount this device.
Wear safety gloves.
mWear safety shoes.
1 secure the device against falling off/out.

2 loosen all mechanical connections.
3 lift the device out of the control cabinet.
4 store the device in a suitable packing.
5 at transportation pay attention to, that the device is not damaged by wrong storage or
severe shocks, also see ZWhat to observe when transporting– auf Seite 141.

Shutdown, storage 12
In case you want to dispose the device, additional data is available in chapter ZDisposal–
from page 317.
12.5 Storage conditions
The device is maintenance-free. If you keep to the environmental conditions during the
entire period of storage, you can assume, that the device will not be damaged. In case
the environmental conditions during storage are not kept, you should assume that the de-
vice is damaged after storage.
CAUTION!
Property damage because of incorrect storage conditions
Incorrect storage can damage/destroy the device.
Therefore:
Assure, that the environmental conditions are kept during the entire period of storage:
m Climatic category 1K4
m Temperature range -25 °C to +55 °C
CAUTION!
Recommissioning without forming of the capacitors.
From six months storage period on, the capacitors are destroyed during commission-
ing, if they are not formed beforehand
m Reform the DC link capacitors:
n by supplying the device ready-to-operate for at least one hour with supply volt-
age
n but do not transmit a pulse enable during this time.
m Consider, that it is imperative, to connect the accordingly prescribed line commu-
tating reactor for this forming procedure. Devices, where no line commutating re-
actor is necessary can directly be supplied with mains voltage.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
12.6 Recommissioning
12.6 Recommissioning
Execute commissioning as with a new device, see 

ZMounting– from page 143, ZInstallation– from page 163.
CAUTION!
Recommissioning without forming of the capacitors.
From six months storage period on, the capacitors are destroyed during commission-
ing, if they are not formed beforehand
m Reform the DC link capacitors:
n by supplying the device ready-to-operate for at least one hour with 
supply voltage
n but do not transmit a pulse enable during this time.
m Consider, that it is imperative, to connect the accordingly prescribed line commu-
tating reactor for this forming procedure. Devices, where no line commutating re-
actor is necessary can directly be supplied with mains voltage.

13 DISPOSAL
NOTE!
Baumüller products are not subject to the scope of application of the EU's Waste
Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive (WEEE, 2012/19/EU). Hence,
Baumüller is not obligated to bear any costs for taking back and disposing of old de-
vices.
13.1 Safety notes
DANGER!
Therefore:

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
13.1 Safety notes
CAUTION!
Danger due to sharp edges.
If the device is lifted with unprotected hands during deinstallation, palms or fingers
can be cut. If the device falls, feet could be injured.
Therefore:
sembly instructions, mount this device.
Wear safety gloves.
Wear safety shoes.
WARNING!
Danger of physical impact!
Secure device against falling down.
Therefore:
m Take suitable measures, such as supports, hoists and assisting personnel, to en-
sure that device cannot fall down.
m Use appropriate means of transport.
NOTICE!
Avoid polluting the environment as a result of improper disposal.
Therefore:
m Only dispose in compliance with the health and safety regulations.
m Take heed of any special local regulations. If you are unable to directly ensure safe
disposal yourself, commission a suitable disposal contractor.
m In the event of a fire, hazardous substances could possibly be generated or re-
leased.
m Do not expose electronic components to high temperatures.
m Beryllium oxide is used as inner insulation, for example for various power semicon-
ductors. The beryllium dust that is generated upon opening is injurious to the
health.
Do not open electronic components.
m Dispose of capacitors, semiconductor modules and electronic scrap as special
waste.

Disposal 13
WARNING!
Danger as a result of faulty deinstallation!
The deinstallation and disposal requires qualified personnel with adequate experi-
ence.
Therefore:
m Only allow deinstallation and disposal to be performed by qualified personnel.
13.2 Disposal facilities/authorities
Ensure that the disposal is handled in compliance with the disposal policies of your com-
pany, as well as with all national regulations of the responsible disposal facilities and au-
thorities. In case of doubt, consult the bureau of commerce or environmental protection
authority responsible for your company.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
13.2 Disposal facilities/authorities

APPENDIX A - ABBREVIATIONS
A Ampere Iset Current set value
AC Alternating current LT Power unit
BB Ready-to-operate M24 Reference potential 24 V
BBext Ready-to-operate (external) MR1 Torque direction 1
BBint Ready-to-operate (internal) MR2 Torque direction 2
BSA Reference potential analog n=0 Speed = 0
BSD Reference potential digital nist Speed actual value
CiA CAN in Automation nmax Maximum speed
DC Direct current nmin Minimum speed
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung NN Altitude over sea level
e.V. (German Institute for Stan-
nsoll Speed set value
dardization)
PE Protective conductor
EMF Electromotive force
PELV Protective extra-low voltage with
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
safety separation, earthed
EN European standard
RF Controller enable
ESD Electrostatic discharge
SELV Safety extra-low voltage with safe-
EXT, ext external ty separation
FI Residual current SH Quick stop
HS Main contactor SM Synchronous motor
Î Peak current, curve shape not de- TM Motor temperature sensor
fined
U Voltage
IAC Effective value, alternating current
Û Peak voltage
IAist Armature current actual value
UA Armature voltage
IDC Effective value, direct current
UAC Effective value, alternating voltage
Ieff Effective value, alternating current
UDC Effective value, direct-current volt-
IF Pulse enable age
IF Field current Ueff Effective value, alternating voltage
ID No. Identification number UZK DC-link voltage
Ink PPR count of incremental encoder V Volt
IS Impulse inhibit VDE Association for Electrical, Elec-
ISO International Organization for tronic & Information Technologies
Standardization ZK DC-link

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
A

APPENDIX B - DECLARATION OF
CONFORMITY
B.1 Declaration of conformity

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
EU - Declaration of Conformity Doc.-No. 5.10065.05

Date: 14.06.2016
according to EMC Directive 2014/30/EU and
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
The Manufacturer: Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH

Ostendstraße 80-90
90482 Nürnberg, Germany
declares, that the products:
Brand name: Baumüller
Designation: b maXX 4400, b maXX 4600 and b maXX 4700 without safety relay 
Type: BM4XXX-XXX-XX1XX, BM4XXX-XXX-XX2XX, BM4XXX-XXX-XX3XX
manufactured since: 30.11.2010
Designation: b maXX 4400 ES, b maXX 4600 ES and b maXX 4700 ES without safety relay 
Type: BM4XXX-XXX-XX4XX, BM4XXX-XXX-XX5XX
are developed, designed and manufactured in accordance with the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU and the Low
Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU.
Applied harmonized standards:
Standard Title
DIN EN 62061:2010-05 Safety of machinery - Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable
electronic control systems
DIN EN 61800-5-1:2008-04 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
Part 5-1: Safety requirements. Electrical, thermal and energy
DIN EN 61800-5-2:2008-04 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
Part 5-2: Safety requirements. Functional
DIN EN 61800-3:2012-09 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems.
Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods
Attention should be paid to the safety instructions in the manual.
Nuremberg / 14-Jun-2016
Location / Date

Declaration of Conformity B
EU - Declaration of Conformity Doc.-No. 5.10065.05

Date: 14-Jun-2016
according to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
The Manufacturer: Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH
Ostendstraße 80-90
90482 Nürnberg, Germany
declares, that the products:
Brand name: Baumüller
Designation: b maXX 4400, b maXX 4600 and b maXX 4700 with safety relay 
Type: BM4XXX-XXX-XX1XX, BM4XXX-XXX-XX2XX, BM4XXX-XXX-XX3XX
Designation: b maXX 4400 ES, b maXX 4600 ES and b maXX 4700 ES with safety relay 
Type: BM4XXX-XXX-XX4XX, BM4XXX-XXX-XX5XX
are developed, designed and manufactured in accordance with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC. These products com-
plies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2014/30/EU and the Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU.
Applied harmonized standards:
Norm Title
EN 62061:2016-05 Safety of machinery - Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic
control systems
EN ISO 13849-1:2008 Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems, 
AC: 2009 Part 1: General principles for design
EN ISO 13849-2:2008 Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems Part 2: Validation
EN 61800-5-1: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-1: Safety requirements. Electrical, thermal and energy
2008-04
EN 61800-5-2:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 5-2: Safety requirements. Functional
EN 60204-1:2006 Electrical equipment of machines Part 1:General requirements
A1:2009
EN 61800-3:2012-09 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods
IEC 61508, Teil 1-7: Functional safety of safety-related electrical, electronic and programmable electronic control systems
2010
Authorized person to compile the technical files: 

Name: Engelbert Meier, Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH, Section AES
Address: Ostendstraße 80-90, 90482 Nürnberg, Germany
Notified body executed the EC type-examination procedures according to Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC:
Name: TÜV Rheinland Industrie Service GmbH 
Address: Am Grauen Stein, 51105 Köln / Germany
Identification number: 0035
Registration numbers: 01/205/5327/13 (BM441X-442X), 01/205/5326/13 (BM443X-447X), 
01/205/5324/13 (BM463X-BM466X), 01/205/5325/13 (BM475X-BM477X)
Attention should be paid to the safety instructions in the manual.
This product is to be used in machinery and must not put into operation until the machinery, into with it is incorporated, has been declared
to be in conformity with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.
Nuremberg / 14-Jun-2016
Location / Date
Subject to change of this declaration of EC conformity without notice. Actual valid edition on request.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358

APPENDIX C - SAFE STOP
In this chapter the safety function „Safe stop“ is described for b maXX 4000. This safety function
is valid for BM4400, BM4600 and BM4700.
C.1 Methods to avoid an unexpected starting
In order to avoid danger for persons, for example operators, service- and maintenance techni-
cians, the machine must be kept in a safe state (safe stop), while taking action in the dangerous
area of the machine. Therefore a reliable prevention of an unexpected starting is required (Ma-
chine Directive 06/42/EG, attachment I, 1.2.4; EN ISO 12100-1; EN 60204-1, 5.4; EN 62061;
EN 61800-5-2). Unexpected starting causes a risk for persons, because of its unexpected oc-
currence (EN 292-1).
Besides the transmission of the enable state into the operating state of the machine, the unex-
pected starting of the machine must be considered. This is the transmission from the safe stop
into an unsafe moving. Unexpected starting refers to an interruption of the control loop of the
machine. The drive achieves the maximum speed at maximum acceleration, due to its control.
The operator will not be able to leave the danger area or to remove his hand from the danger
area. Therefore, the drive must be kept safe „off-position“ with opened and electrical interlocked
safety devices. The motor must be in torqueless state. Thus, the motor cannot generate a dan-
gerous movement.
The prevention of an unexpected starting of the machine is reached with electrical separated
safety devices, e.g. contactors.
This is not state of the art, because the conventional operation in the power circuit of the drive
may cause unnecessary wear on the switching element and long response times in the ma-
chine.
Some machine types are not electrically isolated between the electrical connection of the drive
and the power supply. If, for example, a drive supplied by a power converter is stopped and
started again very often and in short intervals. The constant discharging and recharging of the
DC link represents a great stress for the parts and leads to disturbing delays and early failures
of the parts.
The integration of the protection function is more efficient for preventing an unexpected starting
directly into the inverter. Here, the drive is not isolated from the power supply. However, the
commutation of the power semiconductors is safety prevented in the inverter.
In Baumüller inverters of the b maXX 4000, this occurs by the safety relay, which switches the
power supply off for the IGBT control.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
C.1 Methods to avoid an unexpected starting
In the Baumüller converters of b maXX 4000 this is accomplished by the safety relay, which
switches the power supply off for the IGBT control.
The device models are available with one safety relay (BM4000 size 1 - 7) or with two safety
relays (BM4000, size 3 - 7). The version with one safety relay is shutdown path 1. The version
with double safety relay are the shutdown paths 1 and 2.
For a safe two-channel shutdown with one safety relay, a second shutdown path at the
Baumüller BM4000 controller LC3 is achieved via the pulse enable circuit of the controller. Ad-
ditionally the pulses for the IGBT control are disabled at this circuit.
Refer to ZC.2 Safe Torque Off (STO)– from page 330 for additional information.
Physical relationship
The precondition for starting an AC motor is the generation of a rotating field, which drives the
armature of the motor. When having variable-speed AC current drives, in the microprocessors
usually a complex pulse pattern is generated. Then the pulses are amplified and are used for
switching the power semiconductors. If no defined pulse pattern is available or the amplifying
connection is interrupted, e. g. by switching off the power supply with a relay (safety relay), then
a rotary field cannot be generated. An error at the pulse pattern generation therefore cannot lead
to a starting of the motor, as long as the second precondition, namely the interruption of the am-
plifying power supply is available and vice versa. The protection against unexpected starting is
reached by an electromechanical method which is superior to the electronics. This is reached
by a safe isolation, which is not executed in the load circuit.
Energy supply of the motor windings at a stop is reached by inhibiting the power semiconduc-
tors. Semiconductors can fail or can be started accidentally, due to electromagnetic interferenc-
es. The behavior of the shut down drive must be considered, in case of this error. The fail and
the accidental switching on of a single or of several power semiconductors at the same DC-link
pole, does not cause does not lead to an uncontrollable starting, as there is no current flow. If
an additional power semiconductor is enabled at another pole, current is able to flow through
the motor. If, thereby the DC link is directly short-circuited, the fuses which are upstreamed to
the converter are tripped, the motor doesn’t start. If the DC link is „short-circuited“ over a winding
of the motor, a magnetic field can be set up in the motor. If it is an asynchronous motor, then the
generated d. c. magnetic field cannot cause a movement of the rotor. By the permanent-mag-
netic synchronous motor the rotor will rotate into a notch position. The angular movement which
is covered is dependable of the choke ‘s position and the number of pole pairs of the motor. It
amounts to maximum 180°/number of pole pairs. Subsequently the enabled DC link operates
like a brake, this means after the ending of the movement the drive is in a blocked state. A start-
ing of the drive is impossible. If a machine with a synchronous motor is planned, the possible
movement must be considered, because it can lead to a dangerous movement. Therefore the
machine constructor must carry out a safety evaluation for the residual movement.

Safe stop E
NOTE
At total failure of an internal driver (IGBT) or an control element, it can trigger a tem-
porary excitation of the drive (also in the STO state).
If the link to a winding of the motor is „short-circuited“, a magnetic field develops in
the motor. If this is an asynchronous motor, the generated DC field cannot effect a
movement of the rotor.
The rotor in a permanently energized synchronous motor will rotate into a notch po-
sition. The angular movement depends on the rotor position and the number of pole
pairs of the motor. It amounts to a maximum of 180°/number of pole pairs.
The possible movement must be considered, if a machine with a synchronous motor
is developed.
NOTE
The function is limited to the prevention of an unexpected starting. The switching of
the safety relay, while the rotor of the motor is rotating, causes an uncontrolled
„coasting“ of the machine. Braking with the converter is not possible.
DANGER!
Danger to life by electrical current!
Power supply voltage can be present at the motor and at the device, if STO / Safe
stop function is active.
Therefore:
m De-energize the device, as it would be done with a device without safety relay. The
device and the motor is not de-energized by the safety relay!
NOTE
There is no isolation from the supply system if the function STO/Safe stop is activat-
ed. There can be potential at the converter and at the motor. In the case of mainte-
nance-, service- and repair- works on electrical components of the drive system,
protection against dangers must be provided by other means (e. g. main switch).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
C.2 Safe Torque Off (STO)
NOTE
If the safety relay is switched off, it is not possible to use a ballast switch at BM441X
and BM442X.
C.2.1 Safety classifications and safety notes
according to EN ISO 13849-1 and EN 62061

In combination with the Baumüller BM4000 controller LC3, the Baumüller b maXX converter
BM4XXX-XXY-XXXXX[Ryy]-S01-xx provides the safety function STO (Safe Torque Off).
m The drive is without torque in STO function.
m The activation of the power amplifier is reliable disabled.
m The STO function fulfills the stop category 0 according EN 60204-1.
The drive stops after coasting, if there is no force at the drive shaft.
If STO function is selected, no danger will occur from the drive.
A starting of the drive without a disabling of the STO function is not possible.
NOTE
A device with safety relay is not a safe device. The device with safety relay does not
comply with the PL level according to ISO 13849 and SIL according to EN 61800, if
the part number does not start with „06“. This device is not certified for safety func-
tions!
NOTE!

Safe stop E
The STO function meets the following classifications and standards:
1) Two-channel connection of the shutdown via 1 safety relay at the basic unit and the
pulse enable channel of the BM4000-controller LC3:
Device models BM4XXX-XXY-XXXXXRyy]-S01-XX
with Y= 1, 3 or 5 (devices with a safety relay):
Size 1 - 7
m PL-d according to EN ISO 13849-1
with the following parameters:
n Structure: cat 4
n MTTFd: high
n DC: low
m SIL 2 according to EN 62061 and 61508
with PFHDssD = 1.5 x 10-10
2) Two-channel connection of the shutdown via 2 safety relays:

Device models BM4XXX-XXY-XXXXX[Ryy]-S01-XX
with Y= 2, 4 or 6 (devices with two safety relays):
Size 3 - 7
m PL-e according to EN ISO 13849-1
with the following parameters:
m Structure: cat 4
n MTTFd: high
n DC: high
m SIL 3 according to EN 62061 and 61508
with PFHDssD = 2.4 x 10-10
Additional instructions for the STO function: EN 61800 part 5.2.

For further information contact Baumüller Application department.
NOTE
The safety classifications are valid, if the following safety notes were consid-
ered and were complied with.
m The classification of the safety category applies only to the STO function.
m The following switching measures must be met to achieve the safety function:
n Two-channel connection of the shutdown via 1 safety relay and the pulse enable circuit of
the BM4000- controller LC3 for applications which require to minimize risks according to
PL-d or SIL 2.
n Two-channel connection of the shutdown via 2 safety relays for applications which require
to minimize risks according to PL-e or SIL 3.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
n Control of the positively driven NC contact.

n Using an external circuit or switching device, which is adequate for two-channel monitoring
(for example safety switching device or safe control).
m The faultless functioning of the relay must be checked at least once a year. The relays must
be de-energized. The closing function of the NC contacts must be monitored.
m The faultless functioning of the second path „Pulse enable“ must be checked at least once a
year. The pulse enable (X3-5/3: IF+ and IF-) must be de-energized. The motor must be
torque-free.
m Prior to switching on the drive for the first time (with a safety device), the state of the NC con-
tacts must be monitored on its closing function.
m An abrupt stop of the drive or an irregular running can be caused by an error in the safety
chain. The drive must be switched off, if this error occurs.
m The STO function separates the drive from its torque, but not from its voltage. For the safe
isolation of the supply, other measures must be executed (for example the use of a main
switch).
m A temporal excitation occurs, if the internal driver (IGBT) or a control element (also in STO
state) fails. The motor can generate a magnetic field for a moment, if the DC link is „short-
circuited“ via a motor winding.
If an asynchronous motor is used, then the occurring DC field cannot cause a jerk of the rotor. 
At a permanent-field synchronous motor the rotor rotates into a notch position. The angular
movement covered, in this case depends on the rotor position and the number of pole pairs
of the motor. It amounts to a maximum of 180°/number of pole pairs.
m The safety function STO may not be used at drives, where an external application of force
occurs.
m A plausibility monitoring must be executed between the request signals for STO and the feed-
back signals by the external control.
m Installation space must be protection class of IP 54, at least.
m Cabling must be done, that no cross-circuits or short-circuits are possible.
m The incoming application must comply with the requirements of the requested minimizing risk
(PL-d/SIL2 or PL-e/SIL3).

Safe stop E
C.2.2 Function principle STO
1) Applications that require a minimizing risk according to performance level d (EN ISO 13849-
1) or SIL 2 (EN 62061) according to chapter ZC.2.1 Safety classifications and safety notes–
from page 330 must have 2 independent shutdown paths, which are used to shut down the
commutation in the power section of the inverter.

For this risk minimization the two-channel shutdown via 1 safety relay with feedback on the
basic unit and the pulse enable circuit of the BM4000 controller LC3 are implemented.

The following Baumüller inverters BM4XXX-XXY-XXXXX[Ryy]-S01-XX in combination with
the Baumüller BM4000 controller LC3 of the accordant device model have these shutdown
paths:

BM4XXX-XXY-XXXXX[Ryy]-S01-XX with Y = 1, 3, 5:
device model with one safety relay and a discrete pulse enable circuit (size 1-7)
2) Applications for a minimizing risk according to performance level e (EN ISO 13849-1) or 
SIL 3 (EN62061) therefore need 2 independent shutdown paths, too.
The difference to 1) is that the two-channel shutdown must be implemented via two safety
relays in order to achieve a minimizing risk.

The Baumüller inverters of the b maXX of the device model 
BM4XXX-XXY-XXXXX[Ryy]-S01-XX in combination with the Baumüller BM4000 controller
LC3 of the accordant device model are provided with these shutdown paths:

BM4XXX-XXY-XXXXX[Ryy]-S01-XX with Y= 2, 4, 6: 
device model with two safety relays (size 3-7) 

These device models provide an additional functional shutdown via the pulse enable circuit
of the BM4000 controller LC3, besides the shutdown via both safety relays.
As the two-channel shutdown reaches performance level e and SIL3 using both safety relays,
the third shutdown path will not be responded to regarding the safety requirements.
The connection diagrams ZC.2.2.3 Connection diagrams– from page 338 and notes ZC.2.1
Safety classifications and safety notes– from page 330 must be complied with.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
C.2.2.1 Shutdown paths
Shutdown Safety relay of the BM4000

path A
The function of the safety relay is executed in fail-safe-technology, also named closed-circuit
principle. The safety function is active, if no voltage is applied to the input terminals (102-3/4;
X103-3/4). At power failure the safety function is ensured. 24V must be applied to the particular
terminals (X102-3/4; X103-3/4), in order to deactivate the function.
The present switching state must be responded at the positively driven feedback contact, to
monitor the safety relay externally (X102-1/2; X103-1/2). The positively action contacts are
closed (NC contact), if there is no voltage at the safety relay (STO is active). Also cable break
is recognized as error.
If the voltage at the input terminals of the relay (X102-3/4; X103-3/4) is switched off, the inverter
generates the message „Power unit warning 20: undervoltage safety relay“ or the message
„Power unit error 87: error safety relay“. At an inhibited pulse enable, the warning message
(warning is not saved) is generated. At pulse enable the error message (error message is
saved) is generated. Commissioning or enabling the drive is possible, if there is no error in the
error memory. This error memory can be reset via the digital input X1/1 of the function module
DIO-01. The input X1/1 must be configured accordingly. The starting pulse length at X1/1 must
last at least 5 ms.
NOTE
The starting and the shutdown sequence of the enabling signals and the safety relay
must be considered, in order to assure a faultless operation of the drive. 
See ZFigure 111– on page 335.
Schematic diagram safety relay

Safe stop E
Shutdown Pulse enable at BM4000 controller LC3
path B
The safety function pulse enable is active, if no voltage is applied to the input terminals 
(X3-3/5). The pulses for IGBT control are inhibited.
24 V must be applied to the available terminals (X3-3/5), to deactivate the safety function.
C.2.2.2 Sequence diagram
The starting and the shutdown sequence of the release signals and of the safety relay must be
considered, in order to assure a faultless operation of the drive.
NOTE
The safety function must be checked, before commissioning the machine, in which
the BM4000, with the safety function STO is installed. For this purpose a protective
function must be enabled (for example door contact). The motor must be with zero-
torque.
Figure 111: Sequence diagram of 1 or 2 safety relays

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Figure 112: Timing diagram: Recommended starting / shutdown sequence.
Different starting / shutdown sequences possible. See table ZDifferent starting / shutdown op-
tions BM4X1X to BM4X7X– on page 337.
1 TBoot_controller dependent on the used option module (from firmware version 03.05) 
approx. 5 s.
2 Tcharge DC link: 1.5 s (exception BM4X3X: 6 s).
3 TSR pulse enable: 20 ms (exception BM4X2X: 200 ms).

Safe stop E
Different starting / shutdown options BM4X1X to BM4X7X
Starting / shutdown condition
BM4X1X
BM4X2X
BM4X3X
BM4X4X
BM4X5X
BM4X6X
BM4X7X
Auxiliary supply (24 V) and  yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
safety relay 1 + 2 and
power supply 
simultaneously ON
Auxiliary supply (24 V) and  yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
safety relay 1 + 2 
simultaneously ON
Power supply „OFF“ power yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
supply „ON“ at pulse inhibit
Pulse enable „ON“ at an activated yes yes yes yes yes yes yes
safety relay
Pulse enable and  no no no no no no no
simultaneously „ON“
Pulse enable and  no no no no no no no
simultaneously „OFF“
Safety relay 1 + 2 “ON“  yes no 1) yes yes yes yes yes
20 ms before pulse enable
Safety relay 1 + 2 “OFF“  yes no 1) yes yes yes yes yes
20 ms after pulse enable
1)
„yes“, if TSR pulse enable = 200 ms

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
C.2.2.3 Connection diagrams
m Device models BM4000 with one safety relay (first safe shutdown path) and pulse
enable at the controller LC3 (sizes 1 - 7) (second safe shutdown path)
BM4000
Figure 113: Shutdown paths with a safety relay and pulse enable at the controller
m Device models BM4000 with two safety relays (safe shutdown paths) and pulse enable
at the controller (functional)
BM4000
Figure 114: Shutdown paths with two safety relays

Safe stop E
The shutdown paths on the terminals X102 and X103 of the converter BM4000 (safety relay)
are implemented by positively driven relays, which interrupt the driver supply for motor control.
The drive can be moved, if the relays carry current, only (control inputs X102-3/4; X103-3/4).
The state of the relay contacts can be obtained via the positively driven NC contacts (signal out-
puts X102-1/2; X103-1/2)
At the device model BM4000 with a safety relay, the second shutdown path is obtained by pulse
enable of the device at BM4000 controller LC3.
The safety function pulse enable is active, if no voltage is connected to the input terminals 
(X3-3/5). The pulses for the IGBT control is inhibited.
24 V must be connected to the terminals (X3-3/5), in order to deactivate the safety function.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
C.3 Safe stop
C.3 Safe stop
C.3.1 Safety categories according to EN ISO 13849-1
Dependent on the possible dangers (these dangers are rated due to the consideration of the
severity of the injuries, the frequency of the length of stay within the danger area and the possi-
bilities to prevent dangers) safety-related components of machines must meet defined safety
criteria. The requirements to safety-based parts are divided into five categories in the standard
EN ISO 13849-1.
Category B requires basic requirements. Safety-approved components and principles in cate-
gory 1, additionally. In category 2 an error between inspection intervals can lead to a loss of the
safety function.
Category 3 complies with the level „the single-error-certainty to recognize errors partially”. The
safety-related components may not lead to a loss of safety function, if one single error occurs.
The errors are not all detected by the system, however. The accumulation of undetected errors
can lead to a loss of the safety function.
Category 4 complies with level „Self-monitoring”. This component detects possible errors.
These errors are reported in time. Therefore, the loss of the safety function is avoided.
The Baumüller converters of b maXX 4000 (BM4X3X-XX2, BM4X4X-XX2, BM4X5X-XX2,

BM4X6X-XX2, BM4X7X-XX2), which are operated with two safety relays (BM4XXX-XX2) op-
tionally, comply with the requirements of category 4 as well as with category 3 (EN ISO
13849-1) for the safety function „Safe stop“.
The Baumüller converters of b maXX 4000 (BM4X1X-XX1, BM4X2X-XX1, BM4X3X-XX1,

BM4X4X-XX1, BM4X5X-XX1, BM4X6X-XX1, BM4X7X-XX1), which are operated with one
safety relay (BM4XXX-XX1), comply with the requirements of category 3 (EN ISO 13849-1)
for the safety function „Safe stop“.

Safe stop E
C.3.2 The safety relay
The function of the safety relay is performed in fail safe technology (closed circuit principle). The
safety function „Safe stop” if no voltage is applied to the input terminals (X102-3/4; X103-3/4).
The operation of the safety function is ensured at power failure. 24V must be applied to the avail-
able terminals, to deactivate „Safe stop“ (X102-3/4; X103-3/4).
The present switching state can be obtained from the positively driven feedback contacts for the
external monitoring of the safety relay (X102-1/2; X103-1/2). If there is no voltage at the safety
relay („Safe stop“). The feedback contacts are closed (NC contact). Cable break is also detected
as an error.
The converter generates „Power unit warning 20: undervoltage safety relay“ or „Power unit error
87: error safety relay“), if the voltage at the input terminals of the relay (X102-3/4;X103-3/4) is
switched off. At inhibited pulse enable the warning „warning is not saved“ is generated and at
pulse enable the error message (errors are saved) is generated. A commissioning or enable of
drive is possible, if no error is detected in error memory. Error memory can be reset via the dig-
ital input X1/1 of the function module DIO-01. Input X1/1 must be configured accordingly. The
switch error storage can, for example, be reset over the digital input X1/1 of the function module
DIO-01. For this the input X1/1 accordingly must be configured. The starting pulse length at X1/
1 must last at least 5 ms.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
C.3 Safe stop
C.3.3 Application example for machine of category 3
The following diagram shows the use and cabling of a Baumüller b maXX 4000 converter in a
machine tool. Complying with category 3 (EN ISO 13849-1), in this machine tool the safe remov-
al of work pieces at an open cover, is possible.
m Application example for machine of category 3 with two shutdown channels: 
Pulse enable and one safety relay.
Figure 115: Version with one safety relay (BM4XXX-XX1)
The switching-off of the electrical drive motor is executed dual-ported.

n S2 (NC contact) and S3 (NO contact) have hardware effects on the pulse enable input of the
converter (X3-5). Only if S2 and S3 display a closed cover (safe state), voltage is applied to
the pulse enable input of the converter.
n S1 (NC contact) has hardware effects on the safety relay of the converter. Only if S1 displays
a closed cover (safe state) voltage is applied at the safety relay input (X102: 3). A torque now
can be generated at the motor shaft. The NO contact of S1 is connected with the monitoring
circuit.
n The monitoring circuit is a fail-safe monitoring control of the category 3 (EN ISO 13849-1). It
checks the directly connected switching contacts of the position switch S1 (NO contact), S2
(NO contact) and S3 (NC contact). The control circuit will not receive an enable signal from
the monitoring circuit, if the cover is not completely closed or if a technically impossible state
of the position switch contacts occurs (for example S1 and S2 display different switch states
or if S2 and S3 show the same switch state). A missing enable signal of the monitoring device
leads to a direct switching off of the converter by means of the control circuit. If the monitoring

Safe stop E
circuit detected an error (for example different switch state of S1 and S2), this is displayed
and the commissioning of the drive is not possible until the error has to the operator and a
commissioning of the drive is not possible until the error is corrected.
n Additionally, the feedback contact of the safety relay (X102-1/2) can be evaluated by the mon-
itoring circuit (not imperative).
n The position switches, which are used, must provide positively operated and mechanical con-
tacts. The position switches must provide a dual-protected connection (a combination of NC
contacts and of NO contacts). The mechanical operation at the safety device must be tamper-
resistant.
The connection cables between the safety relay input (X102-3/4) and the control as well as be-
tween the pulse enable input at the converter (X3-5) and the control may not be installed in a
common cable channel outside the control cabinet.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
C.3 Safe stop
C.3.4 Application example for machine of category 4
The diagram displays the use and cabling of a Baumüller converter of b maXX 4000 (BM4X3X-
XX2, BM4X4X-XX2, BM4X5X-XX2, BM4X6X-XX2, BM4X7X-XX2) in a machine tool. Complying
with category 4 (EN ISO 13849-1), in this machine tool the safe removal of work pieces at an
open cover, is possible.
Figure 116: Version with two safety relays (BM4XXX-XX2)
The switching-off of the electrical drive motor is executed with three channels.
n S1 (NC contact) has hardware effects on the safety relay of the converter. Only if S1 displays
a closed cover (safe state), voltage is applied at the safety relay input (X102-3). A torque now
can be generated at the motor shaft. The NO contact of S1 is connected with the monitoring
circuit.
n S2 (NC contact) and S3 (NO contact) effect the other safety relay of the converter. Only if S2
and S3 display a closed cover (safe state), voltage is applied to the safety relay input (X103-
3). A torque now can be generated at the motor shaft.
n S3 (NC contact) has hardware effects on the pulse enable input of the converter (X3-5). Only
if S3 displays a closed cover (safe state), voltage is applied to the pulse enable input of the
converter.
n The monitoring circuit is a fail-safe monitoring control of the category 4 (EN ISO 13849-1). It
checks the directly connected switching contacts of the position switch S1 (NO contact), S2
(NO contact) and S3 (NC contact) and the feedback contacts of the safety relay (X102-1/2
NO contact, X103-1/2 NO contact). The control circuit will not receive an enable signal from
the monitoring circuit, if the cover is not completely closed or if a technically impossible state
of the position switch contacts occurs (for example S1 and S2 display different switch states

Safe stop E
or if S2 and S3 show the same switch state). A missing enable signal of the monitoring device
leads to a direct switching off of the converter by means of the control circuit. If the monitoring
circuit detected an error (for example different switch state of S1 and S2), this is displayed
and the commissioning of the drive is not possible until the error has to the operator and a
commissioning of the drive is not possible until the error is corrected.
n The position switches, which are used, must provide positively operated and mechanical con-
tacts. The position switches must provide a dual-protected connection (a combination of NC
contacts and of NO contacts). The mechanical operation at the safety device must be tamper-
resistant.
The connection cables between the safety relay inputs (X102-3/4; X103-3/4) as well as between
the pulse enable input (X3-5) and the control circuit may not be installed in a common cable
channel outside the control cabinet.
All information given in the instruction handbook of the converter, especially the chapters safety
instructions, installation and commissioning, must be complied with.
For the use and the installation of the safety devices the relevant legal and official requirements
of the Safety Authorities and of the EU Directives for safety-related requirements at installations
and machines (for example EN 60204-1, Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of ma-
chines - Part 1: General requirements and EN 292-2, Safety of machinery; basic concepts and
general principles for design; technical principles and specifications.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
C.3 Safe stop
C.3.5 Application expansions
The safety function „Safe stop“ is provided via three independent switch off channels and a
hardware pulse enable input (category 4 according to EN ISO 13849-1) at the b maXX 4000
converter (BM4X3X-XX2 to BM4X7X-XX2).
However, in many ranges it is not required to operate „Safe Stop“ in category 4.
In the following, application examples are viewed, at which only two of the three switch off chan-
nels are used.
m Application example 1
Application example for machine of category 3 with hardwired pulse enable input and process
data communication via a field bus. 
Switching off occurs by means of safety relay 1 and safety relay 2.
Herd the hardware pulse enable input (X3:5) is hardwired. The activation of the „Safe Stop“ is
made with two channels via the safety relay 1 and 2 (X102:3 / X103:3).
The release of the converter and the process data communication is made via field bus.

Safe stop E
Application example for machine of category 3 with two switch off channels: 
Pulse enable and a second common switch off channel for safety relay 1 and safety relay 2.
Here the safety relays 1 and 2 are triggered by a position switch and together generate the first
channel. The second channel is generated by the hardware pulse enable input, which is inde-
pendently triggered by the safety relay.

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
C.3 Safe stop
Pulse enable and one safety relay, only
Figure 119: Version with a safety relay (BM4XXX-XX1)
This b maXX 4000 converter is equipped with one safety relay, only. The hardware is identical
with the other converters of this series - the second relay is not assembled. The internal relay
switch off paths are combined and commonly generate the first channel.
The second channel generates a hardware pulse enable input, which is independently triggered
by the safety relay.

Safe stop E
C.4 Requirements on an OSSD test pulse
The test pulses detect static error conditions in the safety-related circuits. The implementation
of the test pulses automatically takes place in the background. The drive functions and the safe-
ty functions are not affected.
The pulse enable inputs (X3-5) and the safety relays (X102-3/4, X103-3/4) of b maXX 4000 are
provided for the use of an OSSD test pulse.
The test pulses have the following limit values:
Value Description
tTPLmax 3 ms maximum low time of the test pulse
tTPmin 100 ms minimum period of the test pulse
OSSD test pulse
Figure 120: OSSD test pulse
Thresholds for the inputs X3-5 and X102-3/4, X103-3/4:
Input Threshold
X3-5  Low level: 0 V to 5 V
(pulse enable) High level: 12 V to 28 V
X102-3/4, X103-3/4 High level: 20 V to 28 V (24 V -15 % / +20 %)
(safety relay)

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
C.5 Technical data safety relay module
DANGER!
Risk of injury by moving parts!
Mechanical effects due to the failure of the safety relay.
Therefore:
The minimum load of the contacts X102-1 and X102-2 (accordingly X103-1 and
X103-2) may not fall below the specified values. Operate the safety relay within the
specification.
NOTE
A device with safety relay is not a safe device. The device with safety relay does not
comply with the PL level according to ISO 13849 and SIL according to EN 61800, if
the part number does not start with „06“.
This device is not certified for safety functions!
NOTE

Safe stop E
Single safety relay:
BM4XXX-XX1-XXXXX-S01 BM4XXX-XX3-XXXXX-S01 BM4XXX-XX5-XXXXX-S01

Single Single Single
safety relay module with safety relay module with safety relay module
high power current contacts low power current contacts 1) Elestra
Coil side, Triggering of one safety relay (X102-3, X102-4)
Rated voltage UDC 24 V 24 V 24 V
Operating voltage range -15% / +20% -15 % / +20 % -15% / +20%
Control current IDC max. 70 mA max. 70 mA max. 35 mA
Feedback contact, 1 x NC contact (X102-1, X102-2)
Switching voltage UDC 24 V 24 V 24 V
Switching current IDC 10 mA to 4 A 2) 10 mA to 300 mA 2) 10 mA to 4 A 2)
Switch-on frequency max. 6/min max. 10/s max. 12/s
Activation delay time at rated voltage UDC max. 25 ms max. 15 ms max. 15 ms
Deactivation delay time max. 15 ms max. 12 ms max. 12 ms
Electrical endurance at least 105 at least 105 at least 105
operating cycles operating cycles operating cycles
Mechanical service life at least 1 x 107 at least 5 x 107 at least 1 x 107
switching cycles switching cycles switching cycles
1)
Customer-specific versions, only.
Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH before using this version.
2)
A switching current of at least 20 mA is recommended. If the load is below 20 mA the switching current must be in-
creased by a base load (see ZFigure 121– on page 352).
Double safety relay:
BM4XXX-XX2-XXXXX-S01 BM4XXX-XX4-XXXXX-S01 BM4XXX-XX6-XXXXX-S01

Double Double Double
safety relay module with safety relay module with safety relay module
high power current contacts low power current contacts1) Elestra
Coil side, input signal of two safety relays (X102-3, X102-4) (X103-3, X103-4)
Rated voltage UDC 24 V 24 V 24 V
Operating voltage range -15% / +20% -15 % / +20 % -15% / +20%
Control current IDC max. 70 mA max. 70 mA max. 35 mA
Feedback contact, 1 x NC contact (X102-1, X102-2) (X103-1, X103-2)
Switching voltage UDC 24 V 24 V 24 V
2) 2)
Switching current IDC 10 mA to 4 A 10 mA to 300 mA 10 mA to 4 A 2)
Switch-on frequency max. 6/min max. 10/s max. 12/s
Activation delay time at rated voltage UDC max. 25 ms max. 15 ms max. 15 ms
Deactivation delay time max. 15 ms max. 12 ms max. 12 ms
5 5
Electrical endurance at least 10 operating at least 10 operating cycles at least 105 operating
cycles cycles
Mechanical service life at least 1 x 107 switching at least 5 x 107 switching at least 1 x 107 switching
cycles cycles cycles
1)
Customer-specific versions, only.
Contact Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH before using this version.
2)
A switching current of at least 20 mA is recommended. If the load is below 20 mA the switching current must be in-
creased by a base load (see ZFigure 121– on page 352).

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
m Installation of the feedback contact with a permanent load
Figure 121: Installation of the feedback contact with permanent load
Continuous load e.g.:

Housing: Phoenix Contact, EMG12-B2
Part No.: 2948306
Transparent cover: Phoenix Contact, BMG12-H 7.5 mm
Part No.: 2947116
Resistor: 1.2 k / 1 W at TU = 70 °C

Table of Figures
Table of Figures
Signs and labels BM4X1X............................................................................................................................ 25
Signs and labels BM4X3X/BM4X4X ............................................................................................................ 26
Signs and labels BM4X5X............................................................................................................................ 27
Signs and labels BM4X6X, BM4X7X ........................................................................................................... 28
Type code labeling ....................................................................................................................................... 29
Dimensions BM441X.................................................................................................................................... 32
Dimensions BM442X-S/A............................................................................................................................. 33
Dimensions BM442X-F/C............................................................................................................................. 34
Dimensions BM443X-S/Z, BM443X-A/F ...................................................................................................... 35
Dimensions BM443X-C, BM463X-F............................................................................................................. 36
Dimensions BM444X-S/Z, BM464X-S/Z ...................................................................................................... 37
Dimensions BM444X-A/F, BM464X-A/F ...................................................................................................... 38
Dimensions BM445X-S/Z, BM465X-S/Z ...................................................................................................... 39
Dimensions BM445X-A/F, BM465X-A/F ...................................................................................................... 40
Dimensions BM465X-FXX-3XXXX and BM475X-FXX-3XXXX.................................................................... 41
Dimensions BM465X-FXX-3XXXX-RYY, BM475X-FXX-3XXXX-RYY......................................................... 42
Dimensions BM465X-ZXX-3XXXX-[RYY], BM475X-ZXX-3XXXX-[RYY]..................................................... 43
Dimensions BM446X-S/Z............................................................................................................................. 44
Dimensions BM446X-A/F and BM466X-A/F ................................................................................................ 45
Dimensions BM466X-FXX-3XXXX and BM476X-FXX-3XXXX.................................................................... 46
Dimensions BM466X-Z-3XXXX and BM476X-Z-3XXXX ............................................................................. 47
Dimensions BM447X-F, BM477X-F ............................................................................................................. 48
Dimensions BM447X-A ................................................................................................................................ 49
Reducing of the output power in dependence of the absolute altitude ........................................................ 56
Output current in dependence of the input voltage ...................................................................................... 57
Reducing the output voltage in dependence with the input voltage ............................................................. 58
Reducing the output power in dependence of the system voltage............................................................... 58
Calculation of the thermal RMS current ....................................................................................................... 59
Coherence between peak current and rated current.................................................................................... 59
Cooling air requirement................................................................................................................................ 61
Derating of output current BM441X universal units...................................................................................... 64
Maximum external DC link capacitance BM441X ........................................................................................ 65
Derating the output current BM442X universal units.................................................................................... 68
Maximum external DC link capacitance BM442X ........................................................................................ 69
Reducing of output current BM445X universal units .................................................................................... 77
Reducing of output current BM 446X universal units ................................................................................... 80
Derating the output current BM 447X universal units................................................................................... 83
Derating the output current BM4632 acceleration units ............................................................................... 86
Derating the output current BM464X acceleration units............................................................................... 88
Derating the output current BM47XX continuous current units .................................................................... 94
Derating the output current BM442X power modules .................................................................................. 97
Derating the output current BM443X power modules .................................................................................. 99
Derating the output current BM444X power modules ................................................................................ 101
Conversion brake power time area in triangular time area ........................................................................ 107
Braking cycle.............................................................................................................................................. 108
Continuous current derating at a statical output frequency < 15 Hz .......................................................... 112
Reduction BM46XX max. current and PWM frequency at output frequencies < 10 Hz ............................. 113
Reduction BM46XX only max. current at output frequencies < 10 Hz ....................................................... 113
Position of type plate.................................................................................................................................. 125
EtherCAT® Address switch setting............................................................................................................. 138
CANopen® address switch ......................................................................................................................... 140
Danger area near the mechanical mounting .............................................................................................. 145
Drilling pattern BM441X ............................................................................................................................. 147

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Table of Figures
Drilling pattern BM442X ............................................................................................................................. 148

Drilling pattern BM443X, BM463X.............................................................................................................. 148
Drilling pattern BM465X-FXX-3XXXX, BM475X-FXX-3XXXX.................................................................... 150
Drilling pattern BM466X-FXX-3XXXX, BM4766-FXX-3XXXX .................................................................... 152
Drilling pattern BM447X-F, BM477X-F....................................................................................................... 153
Drilling pattern BM447X-A.......................................................................................................................... 154
Mounting instruction BM441X, BM442X-S, BM4X3X-S/Z, BM444X-S/Z, BM464X-S/Z ............................ 156
Mounting instruction BM445X-S/Z, BM465X-S/Z, BM446X-S/Z, BM466X-S/Z.......................................... 157
Mounting instruction BM447X-A/F, BM477X-FXX-3XXXX......................................................................... 158
Mounting instruction „diverse“ .................................................................................................................... 159
Control cabinet mounting BM442X-A/F...................................................................................................... 161
Single phase connection BM441X ............................................................................................................. 167
Single phase connection (BM442X ... BM447X, basic units) ..................................................................... 167
Connection to single phase grounded power supply systems with an isolated transformer ...................... 168
Connection diagram with a directly controlled motor brake - basic units ................................................... 173
Connection diagram with motor brake controlled via an add. relay - basic units ....................................... 175
Connection diagram with a directly controlled motor brake - power modules ............................................ 176
Connection diagram with motor brake controlled via an additional relay - power modules........................ 178
Connection fan ........................................................................................................................................... 179
Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM4412 and BM4413 ............................................ 181
Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM4414 ................................................................. 182
Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM442X ................................................................. 183
Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM443X, BM463X ................................................. 184
Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM444X, BM464X ................................................. 185
Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM445X, BM465X, BM446X, BM466X.................. 186
Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM466X and BM476X ........................................... 187
Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM4755 ................................................................. 188
Electrical connections for power supply, motor, ... for BM447X and BM4773............................................ 189
Connection X100 and terminals of a standard controller ........................................................................... 196
Connection cable BM4-F-ENC-07.............................................................................................................. 211
Skinning length........................................................................................................................................... 220
Error messages 7-segment display............................................................................................................ 234
ProDrive version conflict............................................................................................................................. 235
ProDrive start screen.................................................................................................................................. 236
Project navigation in ProDrive .................................................................................................................... 236
Drive manager ProDrive............................................................................................................................. 237
ProDrive Drive manager............................................................................................................................. 239
Survey error list .......................................................................................................................................... 240
Hazard areas during electrical installation.................................................................................................. 261
Interface cable RS 232............................................................................................................................... 272
Mains filter type code ................................................................................................................................. 294
Type code power choke ............................................................................................................................. 301
Figure power choke.................................................................................................................................... 302
Cable connectors, 12-wire.......................................................................................................................... 308
Cable connector for sine-cosine encoder with EnDat®-interface ............................................................... 310
Sequence diagram of 1 or 2 safety relays.................................................................................................. 335
Timing diagram: Recommended starting / shutdown sequence. ............................................................... 336
Shutdown paths with a safety relay and pulse enable at the controller...................................................... 338
Shutdown paths with two safety relays ...................................................................................................... 338
Version with one safety relay (BM4XXX-XX1) ........................................................................................... 342
Version with two safety relays (BM4XXX-XX2) .......................................................................................... 344
Version with a safety relay (BM4XXX-XX1) ............................................................................................... 348
OSSD test pulse......................................................................................................................................... 349
Installation of the feedback contact with permanent load........................................................................... 352

Index
Numbers Error handling 238
7-segment display 135 Error messages 240
Error reset 239
A EtherCat cable 305
Abbreviations 321 Ethernet 199
Accessories 267
Accidents 23 F
Fault correction 229
B Fire fighting 22
Brake resistor, water-cooled 106 Fuses 273
C G
Cable connectors Guarantee provisions 12
length 307
Cable protection 273 H
Cable RS 232 304 Hard hat 20
Cabling 268 Hardware type 127
Caution 10 Hazards, special 21
Choice of encoders 123 Heidenhain 123
Combinations 120 Hiperface® 205
Connection cables 306
Connection technology 191 I
Connectors 312 Inductance 52
Continuous current derating 112 Initial commissioning 163
Control, higher level 224 Inputs, no. of DI 221
Cooling 61 Inspection 262
Cooling type 126 inspection 262
Crossover package 305 Installation 163
Cross-section 191 Installation, procedure 171
Current power 205 Instruction
Customer service 13 Make cable connector 308, 310
Interconnect devices 123
D
Danger 10 K
Danger situation 23 Key to symbols 10
DC link discharge time 165, 263, 317
Declaration of conformity 323 L
Demounting 314 LED 132
Design cover 312 LED H2 237
Device protection 274 LED H4 237
Display elements 132 Limitation of liability 11
Disposal 12, 317
Drive management 237
M
Mains filters 294
E Maintenance 261
Edges, sharp 145, 314 Maintenance, periodic 264
Electrical current, dangers of 21 Malfunctions, behavior 229
Enable signals 224 Modifications 15
Encoder module 123 Monitoring functions 230
Encoder type 123 Motor temperature sensor 170
Encoders, connectable 123 Moving 22
EnDat 207, 208, 209, 210, 212, 214, 216 Moving components, danger from 22
Energy supply / requirements 52

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Index
N Shutdown 313, 314

Note 10 Signs 24
Notice 10 Signs and labels 24
Sine-cosine encoder 205
O Software release 129
Operating concept 224 Spare parts 12, 267, 304
Operating personnel 19 Square wave incremental encoder 206
Operating requirements 51 Stegmann 123
Operating status 133 Storage 313
Operation, improper 223 Storage conditions 315
OSSD test pulse 194, 200, 349 Supply system 52
P T
Packaging, disposal of 142 Temperature range 55
Parameter list 237 Temperature sensor 170
Parameterization 237 Terminals, controller 195
PE connection 169 Termination plug 306
Personnel, qualified 19 Torque 186
Personnel, training 19 Transport 141
Power chokes 300 Transport inspection 142
Power consumption, external 221 Type plate 29
Power consumption, internal DI 221
Power supply 221 U
Power supply system 126 UL 508 C 162
ProDrive 237 Unexpected starting 327
Protective equipment 20 Unpacking 142
Protective eye wear 20 Usage, compliant with the intended purpose
Protective gloves 20 16
Protective work clothing 20
PSI module 195 V
Pulse enable 133, 224 Voltage test 165
Q W
Quick stop 224 Warning 10
Warning messages 258
R Warning notes 10
Rated supply voltage / frequency 52 Washers 156
Recommissioning 316 Weight 50
Repairs 266
Required environmental conditions 55
Residual energy, danger from 21, 165
Resolver 203
S
Safe stop 327
Safety categories 340
Safety equipment 23
Safety fuses 273
Safety relay 127, 231, 334, 341
Durability 351
Safety shoes 20
Screws 156
Semiconductor fuses 274
Shielding clamp 304

Overview of Revisions
Overview of Revisions
Version Status Changes
5.12008.01 22-May-2013 First issue
5.12008.02 09-Sep-2013 Chapter encoder, encoder cables added

New version declaration of Conformity according Machinery Directive
5.12008.03 10-Jan-2014 Chapter Troubleshooting and fault correction adapted

Correction Technical data
5.12008.04 01-Dec-2014 Error correction
5.12008.05 20-Jul-2015 Calculation for watter-cooled brake resistors
5.12008.06 24-Sep-2015 New choke types, new device type
5.12008.07 7-Jul-2016 Revision Technical data
5.12008.08 26-Apr-2017 Revision

Document No.: 5.12008.08 of 358
Notes:

Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH Ostendstraße 80-90 90482 Nürnberg T: +49(0)911-5432-0 F: +49(0)911-5432-130 www.baumueller.de
All information given in this manual is customer information, subject to change without notice. We reserve the right to futher develop and actualize 
our products continuously using our permanent revision service. Please notice, that specifications/data/information are current values according to the printing date.
These statements are not legally binding according to the measurement, computation and calculations. Before you make any information given in this manual to the basis 
of your own calculations and/or applications, please make sure that you have the latest edition of the information in hand.
No liability can be accepted concerning the correctness of the information.

BM 4400 Series.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BM 4400 Series.

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BM 4400 Series.

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction handbook

BM4400, BM4400 ES

E 5.12008.08 Read the Instruction handbook before starting any work!

 Baumüller Nürnberg GmbH

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 3

3.4 Electrical data basic units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

4 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 5

6 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

11.4 Power chokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 7

8 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 9

1.2 Key to symbols

10 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

1.4 Copyright protection

The instruction handbook must be treated confidentially. It is to be used exclusively by

EnDat® is a registered trademark of Dr. Johannes Heidenhain GmbH,

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 11

1.5 Other applicable documents

1.6 Spare parts

1.8 Guarantee provisions

12 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

Our customer service is available to provide you with technical information.

1.10 Terms used

1.11 List of other applicable documents

Doc No. Part No. Part No.

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 13

Doc No. Part No. Part No.

14 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

2.1 Contents of the instruction handbook

2.2 Changes and modifications to the device

In order to prevent hazards and to ensure optimum performance, no changes, additions

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 15

2.3 Usage for the intended purpose

16 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 17

2.5 Protective devices

18 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 19

2.7 Personal protective equipment

Protective work clothing

Wear for special

Protective eye wear

20 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

Danger from re-

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 21

2.9 Fire fighting

ABC powder / CO2

22 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

2.11 Conduct in case of danger or accidents

Preventive mea- m Always be prepared for accidents or fire!

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 23

2.12 Signs and labels

24 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700

Figure 1: Signs and labels BM4X1X

Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700 25

Figure 2: Signs and labels BM4X3X/BM4X4X

26 Instruction handbook b maXX BM4400, BM4600, BM4700